2014 mini hardtop with onboard monitor

230
OWNER'S MANUAL. MINI. Contents A-Z Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Upload: timdadamo

Post on 09-Dec-2015

239 views

Category:

Documents


7 download

DESCRIPTION

2014 Mini Hardtop Manual

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

OWNER'S MANUAL.MINI.

ContentsA-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 2: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor
Page 3: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

MINI Owner's Manual for VehicleThank you for choosing a MINI.The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better controlyou will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI.Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐tains important information on vehicle operation that will helpyou make full use of the technical features available in yourMINI. The manual also contains information designed to en‐hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute tomaintaining the value of your MINI.Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found inthe appendix of the printed Owner's Handbook for the Vehicle.Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration withyour MINIThe MINI team of BMW AG

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 4: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

© 2014 Bayerische Motoren WerkeAktiengesellschaftMunich, GermanyReprinting, including excerpts, only with the writtenconsent of BMW AG, Munich.US English II/14, 03 14 490Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleachedwithout chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 5: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

ContentsThe fastest way to find information on a partic‐ular topic or item is by using the index, refer topage 220.

6 Notes

AT A GLANCE14 Cockpit18 Onboard monitor26 Voice activation system29 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

CONTROLS34 Opening and closing47 Adjusting55 Transporting children safely59 Driving71 Displays86 Lamps91 Safety106 Driving stability control systems110 Driving comfort127 Climate control133 Interior equipment135 Digital compass141 Storage compartments

DRIVING TIPS148 Things to remember when driving151 Loading155 Saving fuel

MOBILITY164 Refueling166 Fuel168 Wheels and tires180 Engine compartment182 Engine oil185 Coolant186 Maintenance188 Replacing components201 Breakdown assistance207 Care

REFERENCE214 Technical data216 Appendix218

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

220 Everything from A to ZLicense Texts and Certifications

Page 6: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

NotesUsing this Owner'sManualThe fastest way to find information on a partic‐ular topic is by using the index.An initial overview of the vehicle is provided inthe first chapter.

Updates made after the editorialdeadlineAny updates made after the editorial deadlinefor the Owner's Manuals are located in the ap‐pendix of the printed quick reference for thevehicle.

User's manual for Navigation,Entertainment, CommunicationThe topics Navigation, Entertainment, Commu‐nication and the short commands of the voiceactivation system can be retrieved via theIntegrated Owner's Handbook.

Additional sources of informationShould you have any questions, your servicecenter will be glad to advise you at any time.Information about MINI, e.g., on technology, isavailable on the Internet: www.miniusa.com

Symbols Indicates precautions that must be followed

precisely in order to avoid the possibility ofpersonal injury and serious damage to thevehicle.◄ Marks the end of a specific item ofinformation."..." Identifies Control Display texts used toselect individual functions.

›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voiceactivation system..››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by thevoice activation system.

Refers to measures that can be taken tohelp protect the environment.

Vehicle equipmentThis Owner's Manual describes all models andall standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series.Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, equipmentis also described and illustrated that is notavailable in your vehicle, e.g., because of theselected optional equipment or the country-specific variants.This also applies for safety-related functionsand systems.For any options and equipment not describedin this Owner's Handbook, refer to the Supple‐mentary Owner's Handbooks.On right-hand drive vehicles, some control ele‐ments are arranged differently than shown inthe illustrations.

Status of the Owner'sManualBasic informationThe manufacturer of your vehicle pursues apolicy of constant development that is con‐ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue toembody the highest quality and safety stan‐dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ fromthose in your vehicle.

Seite 6

Notes

6 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 7: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Updates made after the editorialdeadlineAny updates made after the editorial deadlinecan be found in the appendix of the printedOwner's Handbook for Vehicle.

For your own safetyManufacturerThe manufacturer of this MINI is BayerischeMotoren Werke Aktionengesellschaft, BMW AG.

WarrantyYour vehicle is technically configured for theoperating conditions and registration require‐ments applying in the country of first delivery -homologation. If your vehicle is to be operatedin a different country it might be necessary toadapt your vehicle to potentially differing oper‐ating conditions and permit requirements. Ifyour vehicle does not comply with the homolo‐gation requirements in a certain country youcannot lodge warranty claims for your vehiclethere. Further information can be obtainedfrom your Service Centre.

Maintenance and repairsAdvanced technology, e.g., the use of modernmaterials and high-performance electronics,requires suitable maintenance and repairmethods.Therefore, have this work performed only by aMINI service center or a workshop that worksaccording to repair procedures of the manufac‐turer of the MINI with appropriately trainedpersonnel.If this work is not carried out properly, there isthe danger of subsequent damage and relatedsafety hazards.

Parts and accessoriesMINI recommends using parts and accessoriesapproved by the manufacturer of the MINI forthis purpose.Your MINI service center is the right contact forgenuine MINI parts and accessories, otherproducts approved by the manufacturer of theMINI and related qualified advice.The manufacturer of the MINI has tested theseproducts for safety and suitability in relation toMINI vehicles.The manufacturer of the MINI assumes respon‐sibility for them. However, we cannot assumeany responsibility whatsoever for parts and ac‐cessories that have not been specifically ap‐proved by MINI.MINI cannot evaluate whether each individualproduct from another manufacturer can beused with MINI vehicles without presenting asafety hazard. This guarantee is also not appli‐cable when country-specific government ap‐proval has been granted. Testing of this kindmay fail to embrace the entire range of poten‐tial operating conditions to which componentsmight be exposed on MINI vehicles. Such prod‐ucts could conceivably fail to comply withMINI's own stringent quality standards.

California Proposition 65 WarningCalifornia laws require us to state the followingwarning:Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐bile components and parts, including compo‐nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐cle, contain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer and birth de‐fects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer‐tain fluids contained in vehicles and certainproducts of component wear contain or emitchemicals known to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used

Seite 7

Notes

7Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 8: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

engine oil contains chemicals that have causedcancer in laboratory animals. Always protectyour skin by washing thoroughly with soap andwater.

Service and warrantyWe recommend that you read this publicationthoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐lowing warranties:▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.▷ California Emission Control System Limited

Warranty.Detailed information about these warranties islisted in the Service and Warranty InformationBooklet for US models or in the Warranty andService Guide Booklet for Canadian models.Your vehicle has been specifically adapted anddesigned to meet the particular operating con‐ditions and homologation requirements in yourcountry and continental region in order to de‐liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle isoperated under those conditions. If you wish tooperate your vehicle in another country or re‐gion, you may be required to adapt your vehi‐cle to meet different prevailing operating con‐ditions and homologation requirements. Youshould also be aware of any applicable war‐ranty limitations or exclusions for such countryor region. In such case, please contact Cus‐tomer Relations for further information.

MaintenanceMaintain the vehicle regularly to sustain theroad safety, operational reliability and the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.Specifications for required maintenance meas‐ures:▷ MINI Maintenance system▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet

for US models

▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet forCanadian models

If the vehicle is not maintained according tothese specifications, this could result in seriousdamage to the vehicle. Such damage is notcovered by the MINI New Vehicle Limited War‐ranty.

Data memoryMany electronic components on your vehicleare equipped with data memories that tempo‐rarily or permanently store technical informa‐tion about the condition of the vehicle, eventsand faults. This technical information generallydocuments the state of a component, a mod‐ule, a system or the environment:▷ Operating states of system components, fill

levels for instance.▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from its

individual components, e.g., wheel rotationspeed/ vehicle speed, deceleration, trans‐verse acceleration.

▷ Malfunctions and faults in important systemcomponents, e.g., lights and brakes.

▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐tions, e.g., deployment of an airbag, en‐gagement of stability control systems.

▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature.This data is purely technical in nature and isused to detect and correct faults and to opti‐mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles overroutes traveled cannot be created from thisdata. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐pair services, service processes, warrantyclaims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐mation can be read out from the event andfault memories by the service personnel, in‐cluding the manufacturer, using special diag‐nostic tools. You can obtain further informationthere if it is needed. After a fault is corrected,the information in the fault memory is deletedor overwritten on a continuous basis.

Seite 8

Notes

8 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 9: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

When the vehicle is in use, situations are con‐ceivable in which it might be possible to asso‐ciate this technical data with individuals if it iscombined with other information, e.g., an acci‐dent report, damage to the vehicle, eye witnessaccounts — possibly with the assistance of anexpert.Additional functions that are contractuallyagreed with the customer, such as vehicle lo‐cating in an emergency, enable certain vehicledata to be transmitted from the vehicle.

Event Data Recorder EDRThis vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐tions, such as an air bag deployment or hittinga road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.The EDR is designed to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safety systems for a shortperiod of time, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designed to recordsuch data as:▷ How various systems in your vehicle were

operating.▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were fastened.▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing

the accelerator and/or brake pedal.▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.These data can help provide a better under‐standing of the circumstances in which crashesand injuries occur.EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if anontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are re‐corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐tions and no personal data, e.g., name, gender,age, and crash location, are recorded.However, other parties, such as law enforce‐ment, could combine the EDR data with the

type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐quired during a crash investigation.To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required, and access to the vehi‐cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as lawenforcement, that have the special equipment,can read the information if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

Reporting safety defectsFor US customersThe following only applies to vehicles ownedand operated in the US.If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could cause injuryor death, you should immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic Safety AdministrationNHTSA, in addition to notifying MINI of NorthAmerica, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, NewJersey 07675-1227, Telephone1-800-831-1117.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, itmay order a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, your dealer,or MINI of North America, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe‐rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety from http://www.safe‐rcar.gov

For Canadian customersCanadian customers who wish to report asafety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone

Seite 9

Notes

9Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 10: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You canalso obtain other information about motor ve‐hicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsaf‐ety.

Seite 10

Notes

10 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 11: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Seite 11

Notes

11Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 12: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

WATCH ME.

Page 13: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 14: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

CockpitVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equipment

is also described that is not available in a vehi‐cle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

All around the steering wheel

1 Power windows  442 Exterior mirror operation  523 Central locking system  394 Lamps

Front fog lamps  89

Parking lamps  86

Low beams  86

Automatic headlamp con‐trol  87Daytime running lights  87Instrument lighting  89

5 Steering wheel buttons, leftCruise control on/off, inter‐rupt  110

Cruise control on/off, inter‐rupt  116

Seite 14

AT A GLANCE Cockpit

14 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 15: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Store speed  

Resume speed  112,  117

Set speed  112,  116

Reduce distance  116

Increase distance  110

6 Steering column stalk, leftTurn signal  64

High beams, head‐lamp flasher  64

Roadside parking lamps  86

Computer  79

7 Instrument cluster  718 Steering column stalk, right

Windshield wipers  64

Rain sensor  65

Cleaning windows  66

Rear window wiper  66

Cleaning rear window  66

9 Steering wheel buttons, rightVoice activation  26

Telephone

Confirm the selection  78

Move selection up  78

Move selection down  78

Increase volume

Reduce volume

10 Horn11 Adjust the steering wheel  5412 Unlock hood  180

Seite 15

Cockpit AT A GLANCE

15Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 16: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

All around the center console

1 Headliner  172 Hazard warning system  201

Intelligent Safety  99

3 Control Display  184 Radio/Multimedia5 Glove compartment  1416 Climate control  1277 PDC Park Distance Control  118

Rearview camera  120Parking assistant  122Auto Start/Stop function  61

Start/stop the engine and switchthe ignition on/off  62

DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐trol  106

Head-up Display  83

8 Automatic transmission selector lever  67Manual transmission selector lever  67

9 Controller with buttons  1810 Parking brake  6311 Driving Dynamics Control  108

Seite 16

AT A GLANCE Cockpit

16 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 17: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

All around the headliner

1 Intelligent Emergency Re‐quest  201

2 Indicator lamp, front passengerairbag  93

3 Reading lamps  90

4 Ambient light  90

5 Glass sunroof  45

6 Interior lamps  89

Seite 17

Cockpit AT A GLANCE

17Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 18: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Onboard monitorVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equipmentis also described that is not available in a vehi‐cle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

The conceptThe onboard monitor combines the functionsof a multitude of switches. Thus, these func‐tions can be operated from a central location.

Using the onboard monitor during a tripTo avoid becoming distracted and posing

an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu‐pants and to other road users, never attempt touse the controls or enter information unlesstraffic and road conditions allow this.◀

Controls at a glanceControl elements

1 Control Display2 Controller with buttons and, depending on

the equipment version, with touchpad

Control Display

Hints▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the care

instructions.▷ Do not place objects close to the Control

Display; otherwise, the Control Display canbe damaged.

Switching off

1. Press the button.2. "Switch off control display"

Switching onPress the controller again to switch the screenback on.

Controller with navigation systemThe buttons can be used to open the menus di‐rectly. The controller can be used to selectmenu items and create the settings.Some functions of the onboard monitor can beoperated using the touchpad on the controller:

Seite 18

AT A GLANCE Onboard monitor

18 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 19: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

1. Turn.

2. Press.

3. Move in four directions.

Buttons on controller

Press the button Function

MENU Open the main menu.

RADIO Opens the Radio menu.

MEDIA Opens the Multimedia menu.

NAV Opens the Navigation menu.

TEL Opens the Telephone menu.

Press the button Function

BACK Displays the previous panel.

OPTION Opens the Options menu.

Controller without navigation systemThe buttons can be used to open the menus di‐rectly. The controller can be used to selectmenu items and create the settings.1. Turn.

2. Press.

3. Move in two directions.

Seite 19

Onboard monitor AT A GLANCE

19Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 20: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Buttons on controller

Press the button Function

MENU Open the main menu.

Audio Open audio menu last listenedto, switch between audio me‐nus.

TEL Opens the Telephone menu.

BACK Open previous panel.

OPTION Opens the Options menu.

Operating conceptOpening the main menu

Press the button.

The main menu is displayed.All onboard monitor functions can be called upvia the main menu.

Selecting menu itemsHighlighted menu items can be selected.

1. Turn the controller until the desired menuitem is highlighted.

2. Press the controller.

Menu items in the Owner's ManualIn the Owner's Manual, menu items that can beselected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,"Settings".

Changing between panelsAfter a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", anew panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.▷ Move the controller to the left.

The current panel is closed and the previ‐ous panel is displayed.The previous panel is opened again bypressing the BACK button. In this case, thecurrent panel is not closed.

▷ Move the controller to the right.A new panel is opened on top of the previ‐ous display.

Seite 20

AT A GLANCE Onboard monitor

20 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 21: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Arrows pointing to the left or right indicate thatadditional panels can be opened.

View of an opened menuWhen a menu is opened, it generally openswith the panel that was last selected in thatmenu. To display the first panel of a menu:▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly

until the first panel is displayed.▷ Press the menu button on the controller

twice.

Opening the Options menuPress the button.

The "Options" menu is displayed.

Additional options: move the controller to theright repeatedly until the "Options" menu isdisplayed.

Options menuThe "Options" menu consists of various areas:▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen".

This area remains unchanged.▷ Control options for the selected main

menu, e.g., for "Radio".▷ If applicable, further operating options for

the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".

Changing settings1. Select a field.

2. Turn the controller until the desired settingis displayed.

3. Press the controller.

Activating/deactivating the functionsSeveral menu items are preceded by a check‐box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu itemactivates or deactivates the function.

The function is activated. The function is deactivated.

TouchpadSome functions of the onboard monitor can beoperated using the touchpad on the controller:

Selecting functions1. "Settings"2. "Touchpad"3. Select the desired function.

▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.▷ "Interactive map": operating the inter‐

active map.▷ "Audio feedback": the entered letters

and numbers are announced.

Entering letters and numbersThe entry of the letters requires some practiceat the beginning. In the entry, pay attention tothe following:

Seite 21

Onboard monitor AT A GLANCE

21Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 22: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

▷ For the input of upper/lower case lettersand numbers, it may be necessary to switchvia the controller to the corresponding In‐put mode, refer to page 25, e.g. when thespelling of upper and lower case letters isidentical.

▷ Enter characters as they are displayed onthe Control Display.

▷ Always enter accompanying signs, such asaccents or periods so that the letter can beclearly recognized. The possibility of inputdepends on the set language. Where nec‐essary, enter special characters via the con‐troller.

▷ To delete a character, slide to the left onthe touchpad.

▷ To enter a blank space, slide to the right inthe center of the touchpad.

▷ To enter a hyphen, slide to the right in theupper area of the touchpad.

▷ To enter an underscore, slide to the right inthe lower area of the touchpad.

Operating the interactive mapThe interactive map in the navigation systemcan be moved via the touchpad.Function Controls

Interactive map. Slide in the correspondingdirection.

Enlarge/shrink in‐teractive map.

Drag inwards or outwardson the touchpad with thefingers.

Display menu. Tap once.

Changing settingsSettings on the control display, such as the vol‐ume, can be made via the touchpad. To do thisslide to the left or right accordingly.

Example: setting theclockSetting the clock

1. Press the button. The main menu isdisplayed.

2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐lighted, and then press the controller.

3. If necessary, move the controller to the leftto display "Time/Date".

4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" ishighlighted, and then press the controller.

5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐lighted, and then press the controller.

6. Turn the controller to set the hours andpress the controller.

7. Turn the controller to set the minutes andpress the controller.

Seite 22

AT A GLANCE Onboard monitor

22 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 23: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Status informationStatus fieldThe following information is displayed in thestatus field at the top right:▷ Time.▷ Current entertainment source.▷ Sound output, on/off.▷ Wireless network reception strength.▷ Telephone status.▷ Traffic bulletin reception.

Status field symbolsThe symbols are grouped as follows.

Radio symbols

Symbol Meaning

Satellite radio is switched on.

Telephone symbols

Symbol Meaning

Incoming or outgoing call.

Missed call.

Wireless network reception strength.Symbol flashes: network search.

Wireless network is not available.

Bluetooth is switched on.

Roaming is active.

Text message was received.

Check the SIM card.

SIM card is blocked.

SIM card is missing.

Enter the PIN.

Entertainment symbols

Symbol Meaning

DVD changer.

Music collection.

Gracenote® database.

AUX-IN port.

USB audio interface.

Mobile phone audio interface.

Additional symbols

Symbol Meaning

Spoken instructions are switched off.

Split screenGeneral informationAdditional information can be displayed on theright side of the split screen, e.g., informationfrom the onboard computer.In the divided screen view, the so-called splitscreen, this information remains visible evenwhen you change to another menu.

Switching the split screen on and off

1. Press the button.2. "Split screen"

Selecting the display

1. Press the button.2. "Split screen"3. Move the controller until the split screen is

selected.

Seite 23

Onboard monitor AT A GLANCE

23Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 24: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

4. Press the controller or select "Split screencontent".

5. Select the desired menu item.

Programmable memorybuttonsGeneral informationThe onboard monitor functions can be storedon the programmable memory buttons andcalled up directly, e.g., radio stations, naviga‐tion destinations, phone numbers and entrypoints into the menu.The settings are stored for the remote controlcurrently in use.

Saving a function1. Highlight function via the onboard monitor.

2. Press the desired button for morethan 2 seconds.

Running a functionPress the button.The function will run immediately. This

means, for example, that the number is dialedwhen a phone number is selected.

Displaying the button assignmentUse a finger to touch the buttons. Do not weargloves or use objects.

The key assignment is displayed at the topedge of the screen.

▷ To display short information: touch the but‐ton.

▷ To display detailed information: touch thebutton for an extended period.

Deleting the button assignments1. Press buttons 1 and 6 simultaneously for

approx. five seconds.2. "OK"

Entering letters andnumbersGeneral information1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐

bers.2. Select additional letters or numbers if

needed.3. "OK": confirm the entry.

Symbol Function

Press the controller: delete the letteror number.

Press the controller for an extendedperiod: delete all letters or numbers.

Seite 24

AT A GLANCE Onboard monitor

24 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 25: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Switching between cases, letters andnumbersDepending on the menu, you can switch be‐tween entering upper and lower case, lettersand numbers:Symbol Function

Enter the letters.

Enter the numbers.

or Move the controller up.

Without navigation system Select the symbol.

Entry comparisonEntry of names and addresses: the selection isnarrowed down every time a letter is enteredand letters may be added automatically.The entries are continuously compared to thedata stored in the vehicle.▷ Only those letters are offered during the

entry for which data is available.▷ Destination search: town/city names can be

entered using the spelling of languageavailable on the Control Display.

Seite 25

Onboard monitor AT A GLANCE

25Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 26: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Voice activation systemVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equipmentis also described that is not available in a vehi‐cle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

The concept▷ Most functions that are displayed on the

Control Display can be operated by spokencommands via the voice activation system.The system prompts you to make your en‐tries.

▷ Functions that can only be used when thevehicle is stationary cannot be operated us‐ing the voice activation system.

▷ The system uses a special microphone onthe driver's side.

▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner'sManual to use with the voice activation sys‐tem.

RequirementsVia the Control Display, set a language that isalso supported by the voice activation systemso that the spoken commands can be identi‐fied.Set the language, refer to page 82.

Using voice activationActivating the voice activation system

1. Press the button on the steeringwheel.

2. Wait for the signal.3. Say the command.

The command is displayed in the instru‐ment cluster.

This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐cates that the voice activation system is active.If no other commands are available, operatethe function in this case via the onboard moni‐tor.

Terminating the voice activationsystem

Briefly press the button on the steeringwheel or ›End‹.

Possible commandsMost menu items on the Control Display can bevoiced as commands.The available commands depend on whichmenu is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐play.Short commands exist for many functions.Some list entries, e.g., Phone book entries, canalso be selected via the voice activation system.Speak these list entries exactly as they are dis‐played in the respective list.

Having possible commands read aloudYou can have the available commands read outloud for you: ›commands‹

Seite 26

AT A GLANCE Voice activation system

26 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 27: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

For example, if the "Settings" menu is dis‐played, the commands for the settings are readout loud.

Executing functions using shortcommandsFunctions on the main menu can be performeddirectly by means of short commands, nearly ir‐respective of which menu item is currently se‐lected, e.g., ›Vehicle status‹.

Help dialog for the voice activationsystemCalling up help dialog: ›Help‹Additional commands for the help dialog:▷ ›Help with examples‹: information about

the current operating options and the mostimportant commands for them are an‐nounced.

▷ ›Help voice activation‹: information aboutthe principle of operation for the voice acti‐vation system is announced.

One example: open thetone settingsVia the main menuThe commands of the menu items are spokenjust as they are selected via the controller.

1. Switch on the Entertainment sound outputif necessary.

2. Press the button on the steeringwheel.

3. ›Radio menu‹4. ›Audio settings‹

Via short commandThe desired radio station can also be started viaa short command.

1. Switch on the Entertainment sound outputif necessary.

2. Press the button on the steeringwheel.

3. ›Audio settings‹

Setting the voice dialogYou can set whether the system should use thestandard dialog or a shorter version.In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, theannouncements from the system are issued inan abbreviated form.On the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Language/Units"3. "Speech type:"4. Select the setting.

Setting the voice dialoglanguageYou can set the language in which the voice ac‐tivation and system announcements are to bemade.On the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Language/Units"3. "Speech type:"4. Select the desired language.

Seite 27

Voice activation system AT A GLANCE

27Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 28: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Adjusting the volumeTurn the volume button while giving an instruc‐tion until the desired volume is set.▷ The volume remains constant even if the

volume of other audio sources is changed.▷ The volume is stored for the remote control

currently in use.

Hints on Emergency Re‐questsDo not use the voice activation system to ini‐tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.This can unnecessarily delay the establishmentof a telephone connection.Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 201,in the vicinity of the interior mirror.

Environmental condi‐tions▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters

smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐sis, and speed.

▷ Always say commands in the language ofthe voice activation system.

▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐roof closed to prevent noise interference.

▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehiclewhile speaking.

Seite 28

AT A GLANCE Voice activation system

28 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 29: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Integrated Owner's Manual in thevehicleVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equipmentis also described that is not available in a vehi‐cle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

Integrated Owner'sManual in the vehicleThe Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐played on the Control Display. The equipmentand functions that are in the vehicle are descri‐bed therein.

Components of the Integrated Owner'sManualThe Integrated Owner's Manual consists ofthree parts, which offer various levels of infor‐mation or access possibilities.

Quick Reference GuideLocated in the Quick Reference is important in‐formation for the operation of the vehicle, theoperation of basic vehicle functions or for whatto do in the event of a flat tire. This informationcan also be displayed during driving.

Search by picturesInformation and descriptions based on illustra‐tions can be searched via search by pictures.This is helpful, for example, if the description ofan outfitting package that cannot be named isneeded.

Owner's ManualInformation and descriptions can be searchedby direct entry of a search term via the index.

Select components

1. Press the button.2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle Info".3. Press the controller.4. Selecting desired range:

▷ "Quick reference"▷ "Search by pictures"▷ "Owner's Manual"

Leafing through the Owner's Manual

Page by page with link accessTurn the controller until the next or previouspage is displayed.

Page by page without link accessLeaf through the pages directly while skippingthe links.Highlight the symbol once. Now simply pressthe controller to leaf from page to page.

Leaf back.

Seite 29

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle AT A GLANCE

29Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 30: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Leaf forward.

Context help - Owner's Manual to thetemporarily selected functionThe relevant information can be opened di‐rectly.

Opening via the onboard monitorTo move directly from the application on theControl Display to the options menu:

1. Press the button or move the control‐ler to the right repeatedly until the"Options" menu is displayed.

2. "Display Owner's Manual"

Opening when a Check Controlmessage is displayedDirectly from the Check Control message on theControl Display:"Display Owner's Manual"

Changing between a function and theOwner's ManualTo change from a function, e.g., radio, to theOwner's Manual on the Control Display and toswitch between the two displays:

1. Press the button or move the control‐ler to the right repeatedly until the"Options" menu is displayed.

2. "Display Owner's Manual"3. Select the desired page in the Owner's

Manual.

4. Press the button again to return tothe function displayed last.

5. Press the button to return to the pageof the Owner's Manual displayed last.

To switch back and forth repeatedly betweenthe function displayed last and the page of theOwner's Manual displayed last, repeat steps 4and 5. This opens a new panel every time.

Programmable memory buttons

General informationThe Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐grammable memory buttons and called up di‐rectly.

Storing1. "Owner's Manual" Select via the iDrive.

2. Press the desired button for morethan 2 seconds.

ExecutingPress the button.The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐

mediately.

Seite 30

AT A GLANCE Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

30 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 31: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Seite 31

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle AT A GLANCE

31Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 32: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

HANDLE ME.

Page 33: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 34: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Opening and closingVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equipmentis also described that is not available in a vehi‐cle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

Remote control/keyGeneral informationThe vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐trols with integrated keys.Every remote control contains a replaceablebattery.Depending on the equipment package andcountry-specific variant, the functions of thekeys can be set. Settings, refer to page 42.For every remote control, personal settings arestored in the vehicle. Personal Profile, refer topage 35.Information on the required maintenance isstored in the remote controls. Service data inthe remote control, refer to page 186

At a glance

1 Unlocking2 Locking

3 Unlock the tailgate4 Panic mode

Integrated key

Press the button on the remote control, ar‐row 1, and pull out the key, arrow 2.The integrated key fits the driver's door lock.

Replacing the battery1. Take the integrated key out of the remote

control.2. Slide the key into the opening and raise the

cover, arrow.The battery compartment is accessible.

Seite 34

CONTROLS Opening and closing

34 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 35: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

3. Slide the key in the cover of the batterycompartment and raise the cover, arrow.

4. Insert a battery of the same type with thepositive side facing upwards.

5. Insert cap and cover.Take the used battery to a recyclingcenter or to your service center.

New remote controlsNew remote controls are available from theservice center.

Loss of the remote controlsLost remote controls can be blocked by yourservice center.

Emergency detection of remote controlIt is possible to switch on the ignition or startthe engine in situations such as the following:▷ Interference of radio transmission to re‐

mote control by external sources, e.g. byradio masts.

▷ Discharged battery in the remote control.▷ Interference of radio transmission by mo‐

bile devices in close proximity to the re‐mote control.

▷ Interference of radio transmission bycharger while charging items such as mo‐bile devices in the vehicle.

A Check Control message is displayed if an at‐tempt is made to switch on the ignition or startthe engine.

Starting the engine via emergencydetection of the remote control

Automatic transmission: if a correspondingCheck Control message appears, hold the re‐mote control, as shown, against the markedarea on the steering column and press theStart/Stop button within 10 seconds whilepressing the brake.Manual transmission: if a corresponding CheckControl message appears, hold the remote con‐trol, as shown, against the marked area on thesteering column and press the Start/Stop but‐ton within 10 seconds while pressing theclutch.

Personal ProfileThe conceptIndividual settings in the vehicle are saved inpersonal profiles. Every remote control is as‐signed a profile.▷ Three personal profiles and a guest profile

can be created.▷ Changes to the settings are automatically

saved in the profile currently activated.▷ During unlocking, the profile stored for the

remote control is activated.▷ Your personal settings will be recognized

and called up again even if the vehicle hasbeen operated in the meantime with an‐other remote control.

Seite 35

Opening and closing CONTROLS

35Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 36: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

AdjustingThe following settings are stored in a profile.▷ Radio: stored stations, station listened to

last.▷ Assignment of the programmable memory

buttons.▷ Tone settings.▷ Audio source listened to last.▷ Unlocking the vehicle: driver door or entire

vehicle.▷ Locking the vehicle: if no door is open or af‐

ter starting off.▷ Welcome lamps: on/off.▷ Triple turn signal activation: on/off.▷ Headlamp courtesy delay feature: time set‐

ting.▷ Language on the Control Display.▷ Daytime running lights: on/off.▷ Air conditioner/Automatic climate control:

settings.▷ Navigation: map views, route criteria, voice

output on/off.▷ Park Distance Control PDC: signal tone vol‐

ume.▷ Rearview camera: selection of functions

and type of display.▷ Head-up Display: selection, brightness, po‐

sition and rotation of the display.▷ Driving Dynamics Control: configuration.

Profile management

Opening the profilesA different profile can be called up than the oneassociated with the remote control currently inuse.

1. "Settings"2. "Profiles"3. Select a profile.

Called up profile is assigned to the remote con‐trol being used at the time.

Renaming profiles1. "Settings"2. "Profiles"

The current profile is selected.3. Open "Options".4. "Rename current profile"

Resetting profilesThe settings of the active profile are reset totheir default values.

1. "Settings"2. "Profiles"

The current profile is selected.3. Open "Options".4. "Reset current profile"

Importing profilesProfiles stored on a USB device can be im‐ported via the USB interface.Existing settings and contacts are overwrittenwith the imported profile.

1. "Settings"2. "Profiles"3. "Import profile"4. "USB device"

Exporting profilesMost settings of the active profile and thesaved contacts can be exported.This can be helpful for securing and retrievingpersonal settings, before delivering the vehicleto a workshop for example. The saved profilescan be taken with you to another vehicleequipped with the Personal Profile function.

1. "Settings"2. "Profiles"

Seite 36

CONTROLS Opening and closing

36 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 37: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

3. "Export profile"4. "USB device"

Using the guest profileThe guest profile can be used to make individ‐ual settings that are saved in none of the threepersonal profiles.This can be useful for drivers who are using thevehicle temporarily and do not have their ownprofile.

1. "Settings"2. "Profiles"3. Open "Guest".4. Adjust the settings.The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is notassigned to the current remote control.

Display profile list during startThe profile list can be displayed during eachstart for selecting the desired profile.

1. "Settings"2. "Profiles"3. Open "Options".4. "Display user list at startup"

Opening and closingUsing the remote control

NoteTake the remote control with youPeople or animals left unattended in a

parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐side. Always take the remote control with youwhen leaving the vehicle so that the vehiclecan then be opened from the outside.◀

UnlockingPress the button on the remote con‐trol.

The vehicle is unlocked.Welcome lamps, interior lamp and courtesylamps are switched on.

Press the button on the remote controltwice.

When the door is opened, the window is low‐ered to make it easier to enter the vehicle.

Depending on the equipment version andcountry variant, you can set how the vehicle isto be unlocked. Settings, refer to page 42.The alarm system, refer to page 42, is dis‐armed.

Convenient openingThe remote control can be used to open thewindows and the glass sunroof after unlocking.

Press and hold the button on the re‐mote control.

Releasing the button stops the motion.

LockingPress the button on the remote con‐trol.

Locking from the outsideDo not lock the vehicle from the outside if

there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot beunlocked from inside without special knowl‐edge.◀

The alarm system, refer to page 42, is armed.

Switching on interior lamps andcourtesy lamps

Press the button on the remote controlwith the vehicle locked.

Seite 37

Opening and closing CONTROLS

37Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 38: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

If the button is pressed within 10 seconds ofwhen the vehicle was locked Interior motionsensor and tilt alarm sensor of the anti-theftwarning system, refer to page 43, areswitched off. After locking, wait 10 seconds be‐fore pressing the button again.

Panic modeYou can trigger the alarm system if you findyourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button on the remote controlfor at least 3 seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Unlock the tailgatePress the button on the remote controlfor approx. 1 second.

The tailgate opens a little, regardless ofwhether it was previously locked or unlocked.Depending on the version and the country var‐iant, it is possible to set whether the doors arealso unlocked. Settings, refer to page 42.

Do not place the remote control in thecargo area

Take the remote control with you and do notleave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐mote control is locked inside the vehicle whenthe tailgate is closed.◀

The tailgate is locked again as soon as it ispushed closed.

Provide edge protectionSharp or angular objects can hit the rear

window while driving and damage the heatingwires of the rear window. Provide edge protec‐tion.◀

MalfunctionIf the vehicle can no longer be locked or un‐locked with the remote control, the batterymay be discharged or there may be interfer‐ence from external sources such as mobile

phones, metal objects, overhead power lines,transmission towers, etc.If this occurs, lock or unlock the driver's door atthe door lock using the integrated key.

For US owners onlyThe transmitter and receiver units comply withpart 15 of the FCC/Federal CommunicationCommission regulations. Operation is governedby the following:FCC ID:▷ LX8766S.▷ LX8766E.▷ LX8CAS.▷ LX8CAS2.▷ MYTCAS4.Compliance statement:This device complies with part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐

ence, and▷ this device must accept any interference re‐

ceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes tothese devices could void the user's authority tooperate this equipment.

Without remote control

From the outsideLocking from the outsideDo not lock the vehicle from the outside if

there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot beunlocked from inside without special knowl‐edge.◀

Seite 38

CONTROLS Opening and closing

38 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 39: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Unlock or lock the driver's door via the doorlock using the integrated key.To do this, unlock the cap from below with theintegrated key, arrow, and remove.The state of the driver's door, tailgate and fuelfiller flap does not change.

Remove the key before pulling the doorhandle

Before pulling the outside door handle, removethe key to avoid damaging the paintwork andthe key.◀

Alarm systemThe alarm system is not armed if the vehicle islocked with the integrated key.The alarm system is triggered when the door isopened, if the vehicle was unlocked via thedoor lock. In order to terminate this alarm, un‐lock vehicle with the remote control or switchon the ignition, if necessary, by emergency de‐tection of the remote control.

From the inside

Locking and unlocking

Press the button.The doors and the tailgate are locked.

The fuel filler flap is not locked.

Press the button.The doors and the tailgate are un‐

locked.

In the event of an accident of correspondingseverity, the vehicle is automatically unlocked.The hazard warning system and interior lampscome on.

Unlocking and openingEither unlock the doors together using the cen‐tral locking system buttons and then pull thedoor handle above the armrest or pull the doorhandle on the door to be opened. The otherdoors remain locked.

When there is an electrical defect

From the insideLock the doors via the door locking knobs.Unlock and open the doors using the door un‐locking handle.Unlock the fuel filler flap via emergency unlock‐ing. The state of the tailgate cannot bechanged in this case.

From the outsideLock and unlock the driver's door lock using theintegrated key.

TailgateOpeningWhen the tailgate is opened, make sure there issufficient clearance to prevent damage.

Seite 39

Opening and closing CONTROLS

39Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 40: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

▷ Unlock the vehicle and press the button onthe tailgate.

▷ Press the button on the remotecontrol for approx. 1 second.

Depending on the version and the countryvariant, it is possible to set whether thedoors are also unlocked. Settings, refer topage 42.

The tailgate opens somewhat.Pull the tailgate up to open.

Closing

Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tailgatecan be used to conveniently pull down the tail‐gate.

Keep the closing path clearMake sure that the closing path of the

trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may re‐sult.◀

Do not place the remote control in thecargo area

Take the remote control with you and do notleave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐

mote control is locked inside the vehicle whenthe tailgate is closed.◀

Provide edge protectionSharp or angular objects can hit the rear

window while driving and damage the heatingwires of the rear window. Provide edge protec‐tion.◀

Comfort AccessThe conceptThe vehicle can be accessed without activatingthe remote control.All you need to do is to have the remote controlwith you, e.g., in your jacket pocket.The vehicle automatically detects the remotecontrol when it is nearby or in the passengercompartment.Comfort Access supports the following func‐tions:▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.▷ Convenient closing.▷ Unlocking of the tailgate separately.▷ Start the engine.

Functional requirements▷ There are no sources of interference

nearby.▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control

must be located outside of the vehicle.▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not

possible until after approx. 2 seconds.▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐

mote control is in the vehicle.

Seite 40

CONTROLS Opening and closing

40 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 41: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Unlocking

On the driver's or front passenger's door han‐dle, press the button, arrow.

This corresponds to pressing the remote controlbutton:

Locking

On the driver's or front passenger's door han‐dle, press the button, arrow.

This corresponds to pressing the remote controlbutton: To save battery power, ensure that all powerconsumers are switched off before locking thevehicle.

Convenient closing

Press and hold down the handle of the driver orthe front seat passenger.

This corresponds to pressing the remote controlbutton: In addition to locking, the windows and theglass sunroof are closed.

Monitor the closing processMonitor the closing process to ensure

that no one becomes trapped.◀

Unlock the tailgatePress the button on the exterior of the tailgate.This corresponds to pressing the remote controlbutton:

Do not place the remote control in thecargo area

Take the remote control with you and do notleave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐mote control is locked inside the vehicle whenthe tailgate is closed.◀

MalfunctionComfort Access may not function properly if itexperiences interference from external sourcessuch as mobile phones, metal objects, over‐head power lines, transmission towers, etc.In this case, open or close the vehicle using thebuttons on the remote control or use theintegrated key in the door lock.

Seite 41

Opening and closing CONTROLS

41Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 42: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

AdjustingUnlockingThe settings are saved in the active profile. Per‐sonal Profile, refer to page 35.

Doors1. "Settings"2. "Doors/key"3. Select the symbol.4. Select the desired function.

▷ "Driver's door only"Only the driver's door and the fuel fillerflap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐locks the entire vehicle.

▷ "All doors"The entire vehicle is unlocked.

▷ "Comfort access"The entire vehicle is unlocked. Pressingagain lowers the window when thedoor is subsequently opened.

TailgateDepending on the equipment version andcountry variant, this setting is not offered insome cases.

1. "Settings"2. "Doors/key"3. Select the symbol.4. Select the desired function.

▷ "Tailgate"Only the tailgate is unlocked.

▷ "Tailgate + door(s)"The tailgate and the doors are un‐locked.

LockingThe settings are saved in the active profile. Per‐sonal Profile, refer to page 35.

1. "Settings"2. "Doors/key"3. Select the desired setting.

▷ "Lock if no door is opened"The vehicle locks automatically after ashort period of time if a door is notopened.

▷ "Lock after start driving"The vehicle locks automatically afteryou drive away.

Confirmation signals from the vehicle1. "Settings"2. "Doors/key"3. Select the desired setting.

▷ "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"The unlocking is acknowledged by onehonk of the horn.

▷ "Flash when lock/unlock"The unlocking is acknowledged by twoflashes, the locking by one.

Alarm systemThe conceptWhen the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarmsystem responds to:▷ Opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate.▷ Movements in the vehicle.▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐

tempts to steal a wheel or when towing thecar.

▷ Interruptions in battery voltage.The alarm system briefly indicates tampering:▷ Acoustic alarm.

Seite 42

CONTROLS Opening and closing

42 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 43: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

▷ By switching on the hazard warning system.▷ By flashing the daytime running lights.

Arming and disarming the alarm systemWhen you lock or unlock the vehicle, eitherwith the remote control or via the Comfort Ac‐cess at the door lock, the alarm system isarmed or disarmed at the same time.

Door lock and armed alarm systemThe alarm system is triggered when the door isopened, if the vehicle is unlocked via the doorlock.In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehiclewith the remote control or switch on the igni‐tion, if necessary, by emergency detection ofthe remote control.

Tailgate and armed alarm systemThe tailgate can be opened with the remotecontrol even when the alarm system is armed.

Press the button on the remote controlfor approx. 1 second.

Depending on the version and the country var‐iant, it is possible to set whether the doors arealso unlocked. Settings, refer to page 42.

The tailgate is somewhat raised.If the doors were also unlocked with the tail‐gate, the alarm system is disarmed.After the tailgate is closed, it is locked andmonitored again if the doors are locked. Thehazard warning system flashes once.

Panic modeYou can trigger the alarm system if you findyourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button on the remote controlfor at least 3 seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Indicator lamp on the interior rearviewmirror

▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every2 seconds:The system is armed.

▷ Indicator lamp flashes for 10 seconds afterlocking, then flashes every 2 seconds:Doors, hood or tailgate are not correctlyclosed. Interior motion sensor and tilt alarmsensor are not active.

▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐ing:The vehicle has not been tampered with.

▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlockinguntil the engine ignition is switched on, butno longer than approx. 5 minutes:An alarm has been triggered.

Tilt alarm sensorThe tilt of the vehicle is monitored.The alarm system responds in situations such asattempts to steal a wheel or when the car istowed.

Interior motion sensorThe windows and glass sunroof must be closedfor the system to function properly.

Avoiding unintentional alarmsThe tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensorcan be switched off together, such as in the fol‐lowing situations:

Seite 43

Opening and closing CONTROLS

43Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 44: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

▷ In automatic car washes.▷ In duplex garages.▷ During transport on car-carrying trains, at

sea or on a trailer.▷ When animals are to remain in the vehicle.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor andinterior motion sensor

Press the remote control button againwithin 10 seconds as soon as the vehi‐

cle is locked.The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐onds and then continues to flash.The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensorare switched off until the vehicle is lockedagain.

Switching off the alarmUnlock the vehicle using the remote control.With Comfort Access: if you are carrying the re‐mote control with you, press the button on thedriver side or front passenger side door handle.

Power windowsNote

Take the remote control with youTake the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐ple, cannot operate the power windows and in‐jure themselves.◀

Opening

▷ Press the switch to the resistancepoint.The window opens while the switch is held.

▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐ance point.The window opens automatically. Pressingagain stops the motion.

Convenient opening, refer to page 37, via theremote control.

ClosingKeep the closing path clearMonitor the closing process and make

sure that the closing path of the window isclear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀

▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point.The window closes while the switch is held.

▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistancepoint.The window closes automatically. Pullingagain stops the motion.

Pinch protection systemIf the closing force exceeds a specific value as awindow closes, the closing action is inter‐rupted.The window reopens slightly.

Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐tection

Even with the pinch protection system, checkthat the window's closing path is clear; other‐wise, the closing action may not stop in certainsituations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀

Seite 44

CONTROLS Opening and closing

44 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 45: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

No window accessoriesDo not install any accessories in the range

of movement of the windows; otherwise, thepinch protection system will be impaired.◀

Closing without the pinch protectionsystem

Keep the closing path clearMonitor the closing process and make

sure that the closing path of the window isclear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀

For example, if there is an external danger or ifice on the windows prevents a window fromclosing normally, proceed as follows:

1. Pull the switch past the resistance point andhold it there.Pinch protection is limited and the windowreopens slightly if the closing force exceedsa certain value.

2. Pull the switch past the resistance pointagain within approx. 4 seconds and hold itthere.The window closes without pinch protec‐tion.

Panoramic glass sun‐roofHints

Keep the closing path clearMonitor the closing process and make

sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof isclear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀

Take the remote control with youTake the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐ple, cannot operate the roof and injure them‐selves.◀

At a glance

Tilting the glass sunroof▷ Slide switch back to the re‐

sistance point and hold.The glass sunroof is raised aslong as the switch is pressedand stops in the highest po‐sition.

▷ Press the switch back beyond the resist‐ance point and release it.The glass sunroof is raised and stops in thehighest position.Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Opening glass sunroofWhen the glass sunroof is closed:▷ Press the switch back be‐

yond the resistance pointand hold it.The glass sunroof is openedas long as the switch ispressed.

▷ Press the switch back beyond the resist‐ance point and release it twice.The glass sunroof is completely opened.Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

With the glass sunroof completely raised:▷ Slide switch back to the resistance point

and hold.The glass sunroof is opened as long as theswitch is pressed.

Seite 45

Opening and closing CONTROLS

45Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 46: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

▷ Press the switch back beyond the resist‐ance point and release it.The glass roof is completely opened.Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Closing glass sunroofWith the glass sunroof open:▷ Slide switch forward to the

resistance point and hold.The glass sunroof is closed aslong as the switch is pressedand stops in the raised posi‐tion.

▷ Press the switch forward beyond the resist‐ance point and release it.The glass sunroof is closed and stops in theraised position.Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

▷ Press the switch forward beyond the resist‐ance point and hold it.The glass sunroof is closed as long as theswitch is pressed.

▷ Press the switch forward beyond the resist‐ance point and release it twice.The glass sunroof is closed.Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

With the glass sunroof completely raised:▷ Slide switch forward to the resistance point

and hold.The glass sunroof is closed as long as theswitch is pressed.

▷ Press the switch forward beyond the resist‐ance point and release it.The glass sunroof is closed.Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Pinch protection systemIf the closing force exceeds a specific value as aglass sunroof closes, the closing action is inter‐rupted.

The glass sunroof opens again slightly.Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐tection

Despite the pinch protection system, check thatthe roof's closing path is clear; otherwise, theclosing action may not be interrupted in certainextreme situations, such as when thin objectsare present.◀

Closing without the pinch protectionsystemFor example, if there is an external danger, pro‐ceed as follows:

1. Press the switch forward beyond the resist‐ance point and hold.Pinch protection is limited and the roof re‐opens slightly if the closing force exceeds acertain value.

2. Press the switch forward again beyond theresistance point and hold until the roofcloses without pinch protection. Make surethat the closing area is clear.

Initializing after a power failureAfter a power failure, it may be the case thatthe roof can only be raised. The system must beinitialized in this case. MINI recommends hav‐ing this work performed by your service center.

Seite 46

CONTROLS Opening and closing

46 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 47: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

AdjustingVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equipmentis also described that is not available in a vehi‐cle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

Sitting safelyThe ideal seating position can make a vital con‐tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.The seating position plays an important role inan accident in combination with:▷ Safety belts, refer to page 49.▷ Head restraints, refer to page 50.▷ Airbags, refer to page 91.

SeatsHints

Do not adjust the seat while drivingDo not adjust the driver's seat while driv‐

ing, or the seat could respond with unexpectedmovement and the ensuing loss of vehicle con‐trol could lead to an accident.◀

Do not incline the backrest too far to therear

Also on the front passenger side, do not inclinethe backrest on the front passenger side too farto the rear during driving, or there is a risk ofslipping under the safety belt in the event of anaccident. This would eliminate the protectionnormally provided by the belt.◀

Adjusting seats

At a glance

1 Forward/backward2 Thigh support3 Height4 Backrest tilt

Forward/backward

Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desireddirection.After releasing the lever, move the seat forwardor back slightly to make sure it engages prop‐erly.

Seite 47

Adjusting CONTROLS

47Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 48: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Height

Pull the lever up or press it down as often asneeded to reach the desired height.

Backrest tilt

Pull the lever and apply your weight to thebackrest or lift it off, as necessary.

Lumbar supportThe curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐justed in such a way that it supports the lumbarregion of the spine. The lower back and thespine are supported for upright posture.

Turn the wheel in order to strengthen orweaken the curvature.

Thigh support

Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjustthe thigh support.

Entering the rear

NoteFolding back and locking the backrestBefore driving away, fold back and lock

the backrests; otherwise, an unexpected seatmovement may cause an accident.◀

Keep the movement area unobstructedWhen changing the seat position, keep

the seat's area of movement unobstructed;otherwise, people can be injured or objectsdamaged.◀

Fold down seat back1. Pull lever up to the stop.

2. Fold backrest forward.3. Push the seat forward.

Seite 48

CONTROLS Adjusting

48 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 49: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Original positionThe driver's seat contains a mechanical mem‐ory function for forward/aft and backrest ad‐justment.

1. Push the seat back into the original posi‐tion.

2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.If the backrest is folded back when the seat isnot yet in the original position, the seat latchesin the current position. In this case, manuallyadjust longitudinal direction, refer to page 47.

Front seat heating

Switching onPress the button once for each tem‐perature level.

The maximum temperature is reached whenthree LEDs are lit.If the drive is continued within approx. 15 mi‐nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐cally with the temperature selected last.When Green mode, refer to page 156, is acti‐vated, the heater output is reduced.

Switching offPress the button longer.The LEDs go out.

Safety beltsSeats with safety beltThe vehicle has four seats, each of which isequipped with a safety belt.

Number of safety beltsYour vehicle has been fitted with four safetybelts for the safety of you and your passengers.However, they can only offer protection whenadjusted correctly.

HintsAlways make sure that safety belts are beingworn by all occupants before driving away.To protect the occupants, the belt locking trig‐gers early. Slowly guide the belt out of theholder when applying it.Although airbags enhance safety by providingadded protection, they are not a substitute forsafety belts.

One person per safety beltNever allow more than one person to

wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants orsmall children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀

Putting on the beltLay the belt, without twisting, snugly

across the lap and shoulders, as close to thebody as possible. Make sure that the belt lieslow around the hips in the lap area and doesnot press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the beltcan slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontalimpact and injure the abdomen.The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rubon sharp edges, be routed over breakable ob‐jects, or be pinched.◀

Reduction of restraining effectAvoid wearing bulky clothing, and pull

the shoulder belt periodically to readjust thetension. Make sure that the belt is not jammed;

Seite 49

Adjusting CONTROLS

49Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 50: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

otherwise, the belt can be damaged and therestraining effect reduced.◀

Buckling the belt

Make sure you hear the latch plate engage inthe belt buckle.

Unbuckling the belt1. Hold the belt firmly.2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.3. Guide the belt back into its reel.

Safety belt reminder for driver's seatand front passenger seat

The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐nal sounds. Make sure that the safetybelts are positioned correctly. The

safety belt reminder is active at speeds aboveapprox. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be acti‐vated if objects are placed on the front passen‐ger seat.

Damage to safety beltsIn the case of strain caused by accidents ordamage:Have the safety belts, including the safety belttensioners, replaced and have the belt anchorschecked.

Checking and replacing safety beltsHave the work performed only by your

service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensuredthat this safety feature will function properly.◀

Front head restraintsCorrectly adjusted head restraintA correctly adjusted head restraint reduces therisk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the eventof an accident.

Adjusting the head restraintCorrectly adjust the head restraints of all

occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increasedrisk of injury in an accident.◀

HeightAdjust the head restraint so that its center isapproximately at ear level.

DistanceAdjust the distance so that the head restraint isas close as possible to the back of the head.If necessary, adjust the distance by adjustingthe tilt of the backrest.

Adjusting the height

▷ To raise: pull.▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and

push the head restraint down.

RemovingOnly remove the head restraint if no one will besitting in the seat in question.

Seite 50

CONTROLS Adjusting

50 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 51: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

1. Pull the head restraint upward as far aspossible.

2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull thehead restraint out completely.

To remove the headrest, fold the backrest rear‐ward if it is in the upright position.

Before transporting passengersReinstall the head restraint before trans‐

porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐able.◀

Rear head restraintsCorrectly adjusted head restraintA correctly adjusted head restraint reduces therisk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the eventof an accident.

Adjusting the head restraintCorrectly adjust the head restraints of all

occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increasedrisk of injury in an accident.◀

HeightAdjust the head restraint so that its center isapproximately at ear level.

Adjusting the height

▷ To raise: pull.▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and

push the head restraint down.

Folding down head restraintsExtending/retracting head restraintOnly fold down head restraint if no pas‐

sengers are in the rear. Fold out retractedheadrests again if passengers are being carriedin the rear; otherwise, there is increased risk ofinjury in the event of an accident.◀

▷ To lower flaps: press the button, arrow 1,and press down the head restraint.

▷ Fold back up: pull up head restraints.

RemovingOnly remove the head restraint if no one will besitting in the seat in question.Fold the seat down, refer to page 139, beforeremoving the head restraint, otherwise thehead restraint cannot be removed.

Seite 51

Adjusting CONTROLS

51Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 52: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

1. Pull the head restraint upward as far aspossible.

2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull thehead restraint out completely.

Before transporting passengersReinstall the head restraint before trans‐

porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐able.◀

MirrorsExterior mirrors

At a glance

1 Adjusting2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor3 Fold in and out

General informationThe mirror on the passenger side is morecurved than the driver's side mirror.

Estimating distances correctlyObjects reflected in the mirror are closer

than they appear. Do not estimate the distanceto the traffic behind you based on what you seein the mirror, as this will increase your risk of anaccident.◀

Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, themirror setting is stored for the remote control inuse. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐mote control, the position is automatically re‐trieved if the setting for this function is active.

Selecting a mirrorTo change over to the other mirror:Slide the mirror changeover switch.

Adjusting electricallyThe setting corresponds to the directionin which the button is pressed.

Adjusting manuallyIf an electrical malfunction occurs, for example,press the edges of the mirror glass.

Automatic Curb MonitorWhen the reverse gear is engaged, the mirrorglass tilts downward slightly on the front pas‐senger side. This improves your view of thecurb and other low-lying obstacles when park‐ing, for example.

Activating

1. Slide the mirror changeover switchto the driver's side mirror position.

2. Engage transmission position R.

DeactivatingSlide the mirror changeover switch to the pas‐senger side mirror position.

Seite 52

CONTROLS Adjusting

52 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 53: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Fold in and outPress the button.

Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h.For example, this is advantageous▷ In car washes.▷ In narrow streets.▷ For folding back mirrors that were folded

away manually.Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐matically at a speed of approx.25 mph/40 km/h.

Fold in the mirror in a car washBefore washing the car in an automatic

car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors by hand orwith the button; otherwise, the mirrors couldbe damaged, depending on the width of thevehicle.◀

Automatic heatingBoth exterior mirrors are automatically heatedwhenever the engine is running.

Automatic dimming featureBoth exterior mirrors are automatically dim‐med. Photocells are used for control in the Inte‐rior rearview mirror, refer to page 53.

Interior rearview mirror, manuallydimmable

Flip lever

To reduce the blinding effect of the interior rearview mirror, flip the lever forward.

Turn knob

Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect bythe interior mirror.

Interior rearview mirror, automaticdimming feature

The concept

Photocells are used for control:

Seite 53

Adjusting CONTROLS

53Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 54: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

▷ In the mirror glass.▷ On the back of the mirror.

Functional requirementFor proper operation:▷ Keep the photocells clean.▷ Do not cover the area between the inside

rearview mirror and the windshield.

Steering wheelNote

Do not adjust while drivingDo not adjust the steering wheel while

driving; otherwise, an unexpected movementcould result in an accident.◀

Adjusting

1. Switch on the ignition.2. Fold the lever down.3. Move the steering wheel to the preferred

height and angle to suit your seating posi‐tion.

4. Fold the lever back.5. Switch off the ignition again if necessary.

Seite 54

CONTROLS Adjusting

54 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 55: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Transporting children safelyVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equipment

is also described that is not available in a vehi‐cle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

The right place for childrenNote

Children in the vehicleDo not leave children unattended in the

vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐selves and other persons, e.g., by opening thedoors.◀

Children should always be in the rearAccident research shows that the safest placefor children is in the back seat.

Transporting children in the rearOnly transport children younger than

13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm inthe rear in child restraint fixing systems pro‐vided in accordance with the age, weight andsize of the child; otherwise, there is an in‐creased risk of injury in an accident.Children 13 years of age or older must wear asafety belt as soon as a suitable child restraintfixing system can no longer be used, due totheir age, weight and size.◀

Children on the front passenger seatShould it ever be necessary to use a child re‐straint fixing system in the front passengerseat, make sure that the front, knee and sideairbags on the front passenger side are deacti‐vated. Automatic deactivation of front passen‐ger airbags, refer to page 93.

NoteDeactivated front passenger airbagsIf a child restraint fixing system is used in

the front passenger seat, the front passengerairbags must be deactivated; otherwise, thereis an increased risk of injury to the child whenthe airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐straint fixing system.◀

Installing child re‐straint fixing systemsHints

Manufacturer's information for child re‐straint fixing systems

To select, mount and use child restraint fixingsystems, observe the information provided bythe system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro‐tective effect can be impaired.◀

Ensuring the stability of the child seatWhen installing child restraint fixing sys‐

tems, make sure that the child seat is securelyfastened to the backrest of the seat. The angleof the backrest may need to be adjusted and,where necessary, the headrest height may alsoneed to be adjusted, or if possible removed.Make sure that all backrests are securelylocked. Otherwise, the stability of the child seatis limited, and there is an increased risk of in‐

Seite 55

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

55Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 56: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

jury because of unexpected movement of therear seat backrest.◀

On the front passenger seat

Deactivating airbagsAfter installing a child restraint fixing system inthe front passenger seat, make sure that thefront, knee and side airbags on the front pas‐senger side are deactivated.Deactivate the front passenger airbags auto‐matically, refer to page 93.

Deactivating the front passenger airbagsIf a child restraint fixing system is used in

the front passenger seat, the front passengerairbags must be deactivated; otherwise, thereis an increased risk of injury to the child whenthe airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐straint fixing system.◀

Seat position and heightBefore installing a child restraint fixing system,move the front passenger seat as far back aspossible and adjust its height to the highest po‐sition to obtain the best possible position forthe belt and to offer optimal protection in theevent of an accident.If the upper fixing point of the safety belt is lo‐cated before the belt guide of the child seat,move the passenger seat carefully forward untilthe best possible belt guide position is reached.

Child seat security

The rear safety belts and the front passengersafety belt can be locked against pulling out formounting the child restraint fixing systems.

Locking the safety belt1. Pull out the belt webbing completely.2. Secure the child restraint fixing system with

the belt.3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and

pull it taut against the child restraint fixingsystem. The safety belt is locked.

Unlocking the safety belt1. Unbuckle the belt buckle.2. Remove the child restraint fixing system.3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com‐

pletely.

LATCH child restraint fixing systemLATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.

NoteFollow manufacturer's information forLATCH child restraint fixing systems

To mount and use the LATCH child restraint fix‐ing systems, observe the operating and safetyinformation from the system manufacturer;

otherwise, the level of protection may be re‐duced.◀

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchorsThe lower anchors may be used to attach theCRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined childand CRS weight of 65 lb when the child is re‐strained by the internal harnesses.

Seite 56

CONTROLS Transporting children safely

56 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 57: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Correctly engage the lower LATCH an‐chors

Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors haveproperly engaged and that the child restraintfixing system is resting snugly against the back‐rest; otherwise, the degree of protection of‐fered may be reduced.◀

Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix‐ing system, pull the belt away from the child re‐straint fixing system.

Position

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo‐cated behind the indicated covers.

Mounting LATCH child restraint fixingsystems1. Mount the child restraint fixing system; re‐

fer to the user's manual of the system.2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐

erly connected.

Child restraint fixing system with atether strap

NoteMounting eyesOnly use the mounting eyes for the upper

retaining strap to secure child restraint fixingsystems; otherwise, the mounting eyes couldbe damaged.◀

Mounting points

There are two mounting points for the upperretaining strap of LATCH child restraint fixingsystems.

Retaining strap guideRetaining strapMake sure that the upper retaining strap

is not routed over the head restraints or sharpedges and is free of twisting on its way to theupper mounting point; otherwise, the belt can‐not properly secure the child restraint fixingsystem in an accident.◀

1 Direction of travel2 Head restraint.3 Hook for upper retaining strap4 Mounting point/eye5 Seat backrest6 Upper retaining strap

Seite 57

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

57Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 58: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Attaching the upper retaining strap tothe mounting point1. Raise the head restraint if necessary.2. Guide the upper retaining strap between

the supports of the head restraint.3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to

the mounting eye on the rear seat.4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it

down.

No persons on the back seat when thereis a child restraint fixing system with an

upper retaining strap on the front passengerseat.When there is a child restraint fixing systemwith an upper retaining strap on the front pas‐senger seat, no one should sit in the back seatdirectly behind it, otherwise there is an in‐creased risk of injury due to the upper retainingstrap.◀

Upper retaining strap when the backrestis folded down

When the backrest is folded down, do notguide the belt through the head restraint sup‐ports on the backrest; otherwise the belt maynot secure the child restraint fixing systemproperly in case of an accident

Seite 58

CONTROLS Transporting children safely

58 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

.◀

Page 59: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

DrivingVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equipmentis also described that is not available in a vehi‐cle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

Start/Stop buttonThe concept

Pressing the Start/Stop buttonswitches the ignition on or offand starts the engine.Automatic transmission: the en‐gine starts in selector lever posi‐

tion P or N if the brake pedal is pressed whenyou press the Start/Stop button.Manual transmission: the engine starts if theclutch pedal is depressed when the Start/Stopbutton is pressed.

Ignition onAutomatic transmission: press the Start/Stopbutton, and do not press on the brake pedal atthe same time.Manual-shift transmission: press the Start/Stopbutton, and do not press on the clutch pedal atthe same time.All vehicle systems are ready for operation.Most of the indicator and warning lamps in theinstrument cluster light up for varying lengthsof time.To save battery power when the engine is off,switch off the ignition and any unnecessaryelectronic systems/power consumers.

NoteIf the engine is switched off and the ignition isswitched on, the system automatically switchesto the radio ready state when the door isopened if the lights are switched off or the day‐time running lights are switched on.

Ignition offManual-shift transmission: press the Start/Stopbutton again, and do not press on the clutchpedal at the same time.Automatic transmission: press the Start/Stopbutton again, and do not press on the brakepedal at the same time.All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster goout.To save battery power when the engine is off,switch off the ignition and any unnecessaryelectronic systems/power consumers.Ignition automatically cuts off while the vehicleis stationary and the engine is stopped:▷ During locking, also with the low beams ac‐

tivated.▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged

completely, so that the engine can still bestarted. This function is only available whenthe low beams are switched off.

▷ When opening and closing the driver door,if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled and thelow beams are switched off.

▷ While the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, ifthe driver's door is open and the low beamsare switched off.

When the ignition is switched off, by opening orclosing the driver's door or unbuckling the driv‐er's seat belt, the radio ready state remains ac‐tive.

Seite 59

Driving CONTROLS

59Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 60: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Radio ready stateActivate radio ready state:▷ When the engine is running: press the Start/

Stop button.Some electronic systems/power consumers re‐main ready for operation.Radio ready state switches off automatically:▷ After approx. 8 minutes.▷ When the vehicle is locked using the central

locking system.▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged

completely, so that the engine can still bestarted.

Starting the engineGeneral information

Enclosed areasDo not let the engine run in enclosed

areas, since breathing in exhaust fumes maylead to loss of consciousness and death. Theexhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, anodorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas.◀

Unattended vehicleDo not leave the vehicle unattended with

the engine running; doing so poses a risk ofdanger.Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐ning, set the parking brake and place the trans‐mission in selector lever position P or neutral toprevent the vehicle from moving.◀

Repeated starting in quick successionAvoid repeated unsuccessful attempts to

start the vehicle or starting the vehicle severaltimes in quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel isnot burned or is inadequately burned, posing arisk of overheating and damage to the catalyticconverter.◀

Do not wait for the engine to warm-up whilethe vehicle remains stationary. Start driving atmoderate engine speeds.

Diesel engineIf the engine is cold and temperatures are be‐low approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃, the start process maybe delayed somewhat due to automatic pre‐heating.A Check Control message is displayed.

Automatic transmission

Starting the engine1. Depress the brake pedal.2. Engage selector lever position P or N.3. Press the Start/Stop button.The ignition is activated automatically for a cer‐tain time and is stopped as soon as the enginestarts.

Manual transmission

Starting the engine1. Depress the brake pedal.2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neu‐

tral.3. Press the Start/Stop button.The ignition is activated automatically for a cer‐tain time and is stopped as soon as the enginestarts.

Engine stopGeneral information

Take the remote control with youTake the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐ple, cannot start the engine.◀

Seite 60

CONTROLS Driving

60 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 61: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Set the parking brake and further securethe vehicle as required

Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upwardand downward inclines, further secure the ve‐hicle, for example, by turning the steeringwheel in the direction of the curb. ◀

Before driving into a car washIn order for the vehicle to be able to roll into acar wash, pay attention to the information re‐garding Washing in automatic car washes, referto page 207.

Automatic transmission

Switching off the engine1. Engage selector lever position P with the

vehicle stopped.2. Press the Start/Stop button.

The engine is switched off.The radio ready state is switched on.

3. Set the parking brake.

Manual transmission

Switching off the engine1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the

Start/Stop button.The engine is switched off.The radio ready state is switched on.

2. Shift into first gear or reverse.3. Set the parking brake.

Auto Start/Stop functionThe conceptThe Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.The system switches off the engine during astop, e.g., in traffic congestion or at traffic

lights. The ignition remains switched on. Theengine starts again automatically for driving off.

Automatic operationAfter every start of the engine using the Start/Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is inthe last selected state, refer to page 63. Whenthe Auto Start/Stop function is active, it is avail‐able when the vehicle is traveling faster thanabout 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h.

Engine stopThe engine is switched off automatically duringa stop under the following conditions:Manual transmission:▷ Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is

not pressed.▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the

driver's door is closed.Automatic transmission:▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐

tion D.▷ Brake pedal remains depressed while the

vehicle is stopped.▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the

driver's door is closed.In order to be able to release the brake pedal,engage selector lever position P. The engine re‐mains off.To continue driving depress the brake pedal.When a gear is engaged, the engine starts au‐tomatically.The air flow of the air conditioner is reducedwhen the engine is switched off.

Displays in the instrument clusterThe display indicates that theAuto Start/Stop function is readyfor an Automatic engine start.

Seite 61

Driving CONTROLS

61Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 62: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

The display indicates that theconditions for an automatic en‐gine stop have not been satis‐fied.

NoteThe engine is not switched off automatically inthe following situations:▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐

matic climate control is running.▷ The passenger compartment has not yet

been heated or cooled to the requiredlevel.

▷ The engine is not yet at operating tempera‐ture.

▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or thesteering wheel is being turned.

▷ After driving in reverse.▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐

matic climate control is switched on.▷ The vehicle battery charge is very low.▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked.▷ The parking assistant is activated.▷ Stop-and-go traffic.▷ Selector lever in selector lever position R, N

or M/S.

Starting the engineThe engine starts automatically under the fol‐lowing conditions:▷ Manual transmission:

The clutch pedal is pressed.▷ Automatic transmission:

By releasing the brake pedal.After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.

Safety modeAfter the engine switches off automatically, itwill not start again automatically if any one ofthe following conditions are met.

▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled andthe driver's door is open.

▷ The hood was unlocked.Some indicator lamps light up for varyinglengths of time.The engine can only be started via the Start/Stop button.

NoteEven if driving away was not intended, the de‐activated engine starts up automatically in thefollowing situations:▷ Excessive warming of the passenger com‐

partment when the cooling function isswitched on.

▷ The steering wheel is turned.▷ Automatic transmission: change from selec‐

tor lever position D to R, N or M/S.▷ Automatic transmission: change from selec‐

tor lever position P to R, N, D or M/S.▷ The vehicle begins rolling.▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐

matic climate control is switched on.▷ The vehicle battery charge is very low.▷ Excessive cooling of the passenger com‐

partment when the heating is switched on.▷ Manual transmission: low brake vacuum

pressure; this can occur, for example, if thebrake pedal is depressed a number of timesin succession.

Seite 62

CONTROLS Driving

62 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 63: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Activating/deactivating the systemmanually

Using the button

Press the button.

▷ LED comes on: Auto Start Stop function isdeactivated.The engine is started during an automaticengine stop.The engine can only be stopped or startedvia the Start/Stop button.

▷ LED goes out: Auto Start Stop function is ac‐tivated.

Switching off the vehicle during anautomatic engine stopDuring an automatic engine stop, the vehiclecan be switched off permanently, e.g., whenleaving it.

1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition isswitched off. The Auto Start/Stop function isdeactivated.

2. Set the parking brake.Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.

Automatic deactivationIn certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func‐tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea‐sons, such as when the driver is detected to beabsent.

MalfunctionThe Auto Start/Stop function no longer switchesof the engine automatically. A Check Controlmessage is displayed. It is possible to continuedriving. Have the system checked.

Parking brakeApplyingThe lever automatically engages after beingpulled up.

The indicator lamp lights up red. Theparking brake is set.Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadianmodels

Releasing

Raise lever slightly, press the button and guidethe lever down.

HintsUse while drivingIf on a rare occasion it is necessary to use

the parking brake while driving, do not use ex‐cessive force when applying it. When using it,keep the button on the lever depressed.Otherwise, using excessive force when applyingthe parking brake may cause the rear wheels tolock, resulting in fishtailing.◀

To prevent corrosion and braking control onone side only, lightly apply the parking brake

Seite 63

Driving CONTROLS

63Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 64: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

periodically while coasting, if traffic conditionspermit.The brake lamps will not light up if the parkingbrake is engaged.

Turn signal, high beams,headlamp flasherTurn signal

Using turn signals

Press the lever beyond the resistance point.To switch off manually, press the lever to theresistance point.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lampindicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.

Triple turn signal activationPress the lever to the resistance point.The turn signal flashes three times.The function can be activated or deactivated:

1. "Settings"2. "Lighting"3. "Triple turn signal"The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

Signaling brieflyPress the lever to the resistance point and holdit there for as long as you want the turn signalto flash.

High beams, headlamp flasher

▷ High beams, arrow 1.▷ Headlamp flasher, arrow 2.

Washer/wiper systemSwitching the wipers on/off and briefwipe

Do not switch on the wipers if frozenDo not switch on the wipers if they are

frozen onto the windshield; otherwise, thewiper blades and the windshield wiper motormay be damaged.◀

No wiper operation on dry windshieldDo not use the windshield wipers if the

windshield is dry, as this may damage thewiper blades or cause them to become wornmore quickly.◀

Switching on

Press the wiper levers up.

Seite 64

CONTROLS Driving

64 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 65: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐sition when released.▷ Normal wiping speed: press up once.

The wipers switch to intermittent operationwhen the vehicle is stationary.

▷ Fast wiping speed: press up twice or pressonce beyond the resistance point.The wipers switch to normal speed whenthe vehicle is stationary.

Switching off and brief wipe

Press the wiper levers down.The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐sition when released.▷ Brief wipe: press down once.▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down

once.▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.

Intermittent operation or rain sensor

The conceptWithout the rain sensor, the frequency of thewiper operation is preset.The rain sensor automatically controls the timebetween wipes depending on the intensity ofthe rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir‐ror.

Activating/deactivating

Press the button on the wiper lever.The LED in the wiper lever lights up and a wip‐ing operation is started. If there is frost, wiperoperation is not started.

Deactivate the rain sensor in car washesDeactivate the rain sensor when passing

through an automatic car wash; otherwise,damage could be caused by undesired wiperactivation.◀

Setting the frequency or sensitivity ofthe rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel.

Seite 65

Driving CONTROLS

65Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 66: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Washing the windshield

Pull the wiper lever.The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐shield and activates the wipers briefly.

Do not use the washer system at freezingtemperatures

Do not use the washers if there is any dangerthat the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth‐erwise, your vision could be obscured. For thisreason, use antifreeze.Avoid using the washer when the reservoir isempty; otherwise, you could damage thepump.◀

Windshield washer nozzlesThe windshield washer nozzles are automati‐cally heated while the ignition is switched on.

Rear window wiper

Switching on the rear window wiper

Turn switch from idle position 0 upward, ar‐row 1: interval mode. When reverse gear is en‐

gaged, the system switches to continuous op‐eration.

Cleaning rear windowIn interval mode: turn the switch further, ar‐row 2. The switch automatically returns to itsinterval position when released.In idle position: turn switch downward, arrow 3.The switch automatically returns to its idle posi‐tion when released.

Fold-out position of the wipersHelpful when changing the wiper blades or un‐der frosty conditions, for example.

1. Switch the ignition on and off again.2. Under frosty conditions, ensure that the

wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind‐shield.

3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the pointof resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐onds, until the wiper remains in a nearlyvertical position.

After the wipers are folded back down, thewiper system must be reactivated.

Fold the wipers back downBefore switching the ignition on, fold the

wipers back down to the windshield; otherwise,the wipers may become damaged when theyare switched on.◀

1. Switch on the ignition.2. Press the wiper levers down. The wipers

move to their resting position and areready for operation.

Washer fluidGeneral information

Antifreeze for washer fluidAntifreeze is flammable and can cause in‐

jury if it is used incorrectly.

Seite 66

CONTROLS Driving

66 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 67: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Therefore, keep it away from sources of igni‐tion.Only keep it in the closed original container andinaccessible to children.Follow the notes and instructions on the con‐tainer.United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio isregulated by the U.S. EPA and many individualstates; do not exceed the allowable washerfluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow theusage instructions on the washer fluid con‐tainer. Use BMW’s Windshield Washer Concen‐trate or the equivalent.◀

Washer fluid reservoirAdding washer fluidOnly add washer fluid when the engine is

cool, and then close the cover completely toavoid contact between the washer fluid andhot engine parts.Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a riskto personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀

All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐voir.Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con‐centrate and tap water and – if required – witha washer antifreeze, according to the manufac‐turer's recommendations.Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintainthe correct mixing ratio.Do not add windshield washer concentrate andantifreeze undiluted and do not fill with purewater; this could damage the wiper system.

Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif‐ferent manufacturers, because otherwise it canresult in clogging of the windshield washer noz‐zles.Recommended minimum fill quantity: 0.2 USgal/1 liter.

Manual transmissionShifting

Shifting into 5th or 6th gearWhen shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push

the gearshift lever to the right; otherwise inad‐vertent shifting into the 3rd or 4th gear couldlead to engine damage.◀

Reverse gearSelect only when the vehicle is stationary.To overcome the resistance move the selectorlever in a dynamic movement to the left andengage the reverse gear.

Automatic transmissionwith SteptronicSelector lever positions

D Drive, automatic positionSelector lever position for normal vehicle oper‐ation. All forward gears are available.

R is ReverseSelect only when the vehicle is stationary.

N is NeutralUse in automatic car washes, for example. Thevehicle can roll.

Seite 67

Driving CONTROLS

67Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 68: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

P ParkSelect only when the vehicle is stationary. Thedrive wheels are blocked.Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se‐lector lever position P of the automatic trans‐mission is engaged. Otherwise, the vehicle maybegin to roll.

KickdownKickdown is used to achieve maximum drivingperformance. Press on the accelerator pedalbeyond the resistance point at the full throttleposition.

Engaging a selector lever positionPress on the brake pedal until you startdriving

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after youselect a gear, maintain pressure on the brakepedal until you are ready to start.◀

The selector lever can only be taken out of se‐lector lever position P if the ignition is on or theengine is running.With the vehicle stationary, press on the brakepedal before shifting out of selector lever posi‐tion P or N; otherwise, the selector lever isblocked: shift lock.A lock prevents inadvertent shifting into selec‐tor lever position P or R.

Canceling the lock

Press the button on the front of the selectorlever, arrow.

Sport program and manual mode M/S

Activating the sport program

Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐tor lever position D.The engaged selector lever position, such as S1,is displayed in the instrument cluster.The sport program of the transmission is acti‐vated.

Activating the M/S manual mode1. Press the selector lever to the left out of se‐

lector lever position D.2. Push the selector lever forward or back‐

ward.Manual mode becomes active and the selectorlever position is changed.The engaged selector lever position is displayedin the instrument cluster, for instance M1.Once maximum engine speed is attained, M/Smanual mode is automatically upshifted asneeded.

Switching to manual mode▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐

ward.▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐

wards.Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engineand road speeds, e.g., downshifting is not pos‐sible if the engine speed is too high.

Seite 68

CONTROLS Driving

68 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 69: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

The selected selector lever position is brieflydisplayed in the instrument cluster, followed bythe current one.

Manual mode M/S: prevent automaticupshiftingOnce maximum engine speed is attained, M/Smanual mode is automatically upshifted asneeded.For vehicles with Sport automatic transmission,automatic shift operations are not performed ifone of the following conditions is met:▷ DSC is deactivated.▷ TRACTION is activated.In addition, the kickdown is deactivated.

Ending the sport program/manualmodePush the selector lever to the right.D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Shift paddles for Sport automatictransmission

The shift paddles on the steering wheel allowyou to shift gears quickly while keeping bothhands on the steering wheel.If the shift paddles on the steering wheel areused to shift gears in automatic mode, thetransmission temporarily switches to manualmode.If the shift paddles are not used and the vehicleis not accelerated for a certain time, the systemswitches back into automatic mode if the selec‐tor lever is in selector lever position D.

▷ Shift up: pull right shift paddle.▷ Shift down: pull left shift paddle.The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropri‐ate engine and road speeds, e.g., it does notshift down if the engine speed is too high.The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐strument cluster, followed by the current gear.

Displays in the instrument clusterThe selector lever position is dis‐played, e.g.: P.

Manually release the transmission lockShould the selector lever be blocked in selectorlever position P despite the ignition beingturned on, the brake being depressed and theunlock button being pressed, the transmissionlock can be manually canceled:Before unlocking the transmission lock man‐ually, engage the parking brake forcefully toprevent the vehicle from rolling away.

1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.2. Pull the sleeve over the selector lever. Un‐

plug the cable connector if necessary.3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard ve‐

hicle tool kit, refer to page 188, press theyellow release lever downward, arrow.

4. Move the selector lever slightly toward therear; to do this press the unlock button onthe front of the selector lever.

Seite 69

Driving CONTROLS

69Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 70: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Release the release lever.5. Bring the selector lever into the desired po‐

sition.

Sport automatic transmission: LaunchControl

The conceptLaunch Control enables optimum accelerationon surfaces with good traction.

HintsComponent wearDo not use Launch Control too often; oth‐

erwise, this may result in premature wear ofcomponents due to the high stress placed onthe vehicle.◀

Did not use Launch Control during the break-in,refer to page 148, period.To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC againas soon as possible.An experienced driver may be able to achievebetter acceleration values in DSC OFF mode, re‐fer to page 106.

RequirementsLaunch Control is available when the engine iswarmed up, that is, after uninterrupted drivingof at least 6 miles/10 km.To start with Launch Control do not steer thesteering wheel.

Start with launch controlWhile the engine is running:

1. Press button and select with theDriving Dynamics Control, refer topage 108, Sport+.In the instrument cluster, TRACTION is dis‐played in combination with SPORT. The DSCOFF indicator lamp lights up.

2. Engage selector lever position S.

3. With the left foot, forcefully press down onthe brake.

4. Press on the accelerator pedal beyond theresistance point at the full throttle position.A flag symbol appears in the instrumentcluster.

5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within3 seconds, release the brake.

Before using Launch Control, allow the trans‐mission to cool down for approx. 5 minutes.

Seite 70

CONTROLS Driving

70 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 71: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

DisplaysVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equipment

is also described that is not available in a vehi‐cle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

Instrument clusterOverview, instrument cluster

1 Tachometer  742 Indicator/warning lamps  723 Speedometer

4 Fuel gauge  745 Display/reset miles  746 Electronic displays  72

Seite 71

Displays CONTROLS

71Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 72: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Electronic displays

1 Driver assistance systemsMessages, e.g. Check ControlTime  75External temperature  75Selection lists  78Miles/trip miles  74

Computer  792 Selector lever position display  67

Gear shift indicator  763 Driving Dynamics Control  108

Status

Check ControlThe conceptThe Check Control system monitors functions inthe vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions inthe monitored systems.A Check Control message is displayed as a com‐bination of indicator or warning lamps and textmessages in the instrument cluster and in theHead-up Display.In addition, an acoustic signal may be outputand a text message may appear on the ControlDisplay.

Indicator/warning lampsThe indicator and warning lamps can light up ina variety of combinations and colors.Several of the lamps are checked for properfunctioning and light up temporarily when theengine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Overview: indicator/warning lamps

Symbol Function or system

Turn signal

Front fog lamps

Seite 72

CONTROLS Displays

72 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 73: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Symbol Function or system

Rear fog lamp

High beams

High-beam Assistant

Parking lamps, headlamp control

Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Con‐trol: collision warning.

Cruise control

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deac‐tivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐trol is activated

Tire Pressure MonitorFlat Tire Monitor

Safety belts

Airbag system

Steering system

Engine functions

Parking brake.Brake system.

Symbol Function or system

In Canadian modelsParking brake.Brake system.

ABS Antilock Brake System

In Canadian modelsABS Antilock Brake System

At least one Check Control message isdisplayed or is stored (symbol in dis‐play)

Text messagesText messages in combination with a symbol inthe instrument cluster explain a Check Controlmessage and the meaning of the indicator andwarning lamps.

Supplementary text messagesAdditional information, such as on the cause ofa fault or the required action, can be called upvia Check Control.The supplementary text of urgent messages isautomatically displayed on the Control Display.

SymbolsWithin the supplementary text, the followingfunctions can be selected independent of thecheck control message.▷ Display additional information about

the Check Control message in theIntegrated Owner's Manual.

▷ "Service request"Contact the service partner.

▷ "Roadside Assistance"Contact Roadside Assistance.

Seite 73

Displays CONTROLS

73Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 74: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the onboard computer button on the turnsignal lever.

▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐played continuously and are not cleareduntil the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐sages are displayed consecutively.These messages can be hidden for approx.8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐played again automatically.

▷ Other Check Control messages are hiddenautomatically after approx. 20 seconds.They are stored and can be displayed againlater.

Displaying stored Check Controlmessages1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Check Control"4. Select the text message.

Messages after trip completionSpecial messages that are displayed duringdriving are displayed again after the ignition isswitched off.

Fuel gaugeThe vehicle inclination maycause the display to vary.The arrow beside the fuel pumpsymbol shows which side of thevehicle the fuel filler flap is on.

Hints on refueling, refer to page 164.

TachometerAlways avoid engine speeds in the red warningfield. In this range, the fuel supply is interruptedto protect the engine.

Engine oil temperatureIf the engine oil along with the engine becomestoo hot, a Check Control message is displayed.

Coolant temperatureIf the coolant along with the engine becomestoo hot, a Check Control message is displayed.Check the coolant level, refer to page 185.

Odometer and trip odom‐eterThe conceptOdometer and trip odometer are displayed inthe instrument cluster.

Resetting the trip odometerPress the knob.▷ The odometer is displayed

when the ignition is switchedoff.

Seite 74

CONTROLS Displays

74 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 75: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

▷ When the ignition is switched on, the tripodometer is reset.

External temperatureIf the indicator drops to+37 ℉/+3 ℃, a signal sounds.A Check Control message is dis‐played.There is an increased risk of ice

on roads.

Ice on roadsEven at temperatures above

+37 ℉/+3 ℃, there can be a risk of ice onroads.Therefore, drive carefully on bridges andshaded roads, for example, to avoid the in‐creased risk of an accident.◀

TimeThe time is displayed in the in‐strument cluster.Setting the time on the ControlDisplay, refer to page 81.

DateThe date is displayed in the in‐strument cluster.Set the date on the Control Dis‐play, refer to page 82.

RangeDisplay

After the reserve range isreached:▷ A Check Control message is

displayed briefly.▷ The remaining range is

shown on the onboard com‐puter.

▷ When a dynamic driving style is used, suchas when cornering quickly, operation of theengine is not always ensured.

The Check Control message appears continu‐ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.

Refuel promptlyRefuel no later than at a range of

30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine isnot ensured and damage may occur.◀

Displaying the cruising range1. "Settings"2. "Instr. cluster display"3. "Range"

Current fuel consump‐tionThe conceptDisplays the current fuel consumption. You cancheck whether you are currently driving in anefficient and environmentally-friendly manner.

Displaying the current fuelconsumption1. "Settings"2. "Instr. cluster display"3. "Current consumption"

Seite 75

Displays CONTROLS

75Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 76: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Service requirementsThe conceptThe driving distance or the time to the nextscheduled maintenance is displayed briefly inthe instrument cluster after the ignition isswitched on.The current service requirements can be readout from the remote control by the service spe‐cialist.

Display

Detailed information on servicerequirementsMore information on the scope of service re‐quired can be displayed on the Control Display.

1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Service required"

Required maintenance procedures and le‐gally mandated inspections are displayed.

4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐tion.

Symbols

Symbols Description

No service is currently required.

The deadline for scheduledmaintenance or a legally man‐dated inspection is approach‐ing.

The service deadline has al‐ready passed.

Entering appointment datesEnter the dates for the required inspections.

Ensure that the vehicle date and time are setcorrectly.

1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Service required"4. "§ Vehicle inspection"5. "Date:"6. Adjust the settings.7. Confirm.

The entered date is stored.

Gear shift indicatorThe conceptDepending on how the vehicle is equipped andthe country-specific version of the vehicle, thegear shift indicator is active in the manualmode of the automatic transmission and in themanual transmission.The system recommends the most fuel efficientgear for the current driving situation.

DisplaysIndicators to shift up or down are displayed inthe instrument cluster.Example Description

Fuel efficient gear is engaged.

Shift into fuel efficient gear.

Seite 76

CONTROLS Displays

76 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 77: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Speed limit detectionwith No Passing Informa‐tionThe concept

Speed limit detectionSpeed limit detection uses a symbol in theshape of a traffic sign to display the currentlydetected speed limit. The camera at the base ofthe interior rearview mirror detects traffic signsat the edge of the road as well as variable over‐head sign posts. Traffic signs with extra symbolsfor wet road conditions, etc. are also detectedand compared with vehicle interior data, suchas for the rain sensor, and are displayed de‐pending on the situation.With the navigation system, the system takesinto account the information stored in the navi‐gation data and also displays speed limitspresent on routes without signs.Without a navigation system, the system is sub‐ject to limitations imposed by technology.Speed limits with extra text characters are al‐ways displayed.

No Passing InformationNo Passing Information in the instrument clus‐ter displays the beginnings and ends of nopassing zones detected by the camera. The sys‐tem accounts for only the beginnings and endsof No Passing zones marked by signs.No display is shown:▷ In countries where No Passing zones are

primarily identified with road markings.▷ On routes without signage.▷ Where there are railroad crossings, highway

markings or other situations where no sig‐nage is present, but passing would not bepermitted.

HintsSpeed limits and no passing zones when towinga trailer are not shown.

Personal judgmentThe system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver's personal judgment of the trafficsituation.The system assists the driver and does not re‐place the human eye.◀

At a glance

Camera

The camera is located near the base of the mir‐ror.Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐terior rearview mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off1. "Settings"2. "Instr. cluster display"3. "Speed limit information"If speed limit detection is switched on, it can bedisplayed on the info display in the instrumentcluster via the onboard computer.No Passing Information is displayed togetherwith the activated speed limit information.

DisplayThe following is displayed in the instrumentcluster.

Seite 77

Displays CONTROLS

77Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 78: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Speed limit detectionThe last speed limit detected.Without a navigation system thetraffic signals are grayed out af‐ter curves or longer stretches ofroadway.

With navigation system: speedlimit detection is not available.

Without navigation system:speed limit detection switchedon, but no speed limit or cancel‐lation is detected.

Speed limit detection can also be displayed inthe Head-up Display.

No Passing Information▷ Start of No Passing zone.▷ End of No Passing zone.▷ No Passing Information not

available.

No Passing Information can also be displayed inthe Head-up Display.

System limitsThe system may not be fully functional andmay provide incorrect information in the fol‐lowing situations:▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.▷ When signs are concealed by objects.▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in

front of you.▷ When driving toward bright lights.▷ When the windshield behind the interior

rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ered by a sticker, etc.

▷ In the event of incorrect detection by thecamera.

▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigationsystem are incorrect.

▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐tem.

▷ When roads differ from the navigation, suchas due to changes in the road network.

▷ When passing buses or trucks with a speedsticker.

▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐

ately after vehicle shipment.

Selection lists in the in‐strument clusterThe conceptThe following can be displayed or operated us‐ing the buttons on the steering wheel and thedisplay in the instrument cluster:▷ Current audio source.▷ Redial on telephone.▷ Activation of the voice activation system.In addition, programs of the Driving DynamicsControl are displayed.

Display

Seite 78

CONTROLS Displays

78 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 79: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Activating a list and adjusting thesetting

Button the steering wheel Function

Activate the corre‐sponding list, and se‐lect the desired set‐ting.

Confirm the selection.

ComputerCalling up information on the infodisplay

Press the onboard computer button on the turnsignal lever.Information is displayed on the info display ofthe instrument cluster.

Information at a glance

Info displayRepeatedly pressing the buttonon the turn signal lever calls upthe following information on theinfo display:▷ Range.

▷ GREEN Info.When GREEN Mode is activated.

▷ Average fuel consumption.

▷ Current fuel consumption.▷ Average speed.▷ Date.▷ Engine temperature display.▷ Distance to destination.

When destination guidance is activated inthe navigation system.

▷ Time of arrival.When destination guidance is activated inthe navigation system.

▷ Speed limit detection.▷ Speed.

Adjusting the info displayYou can select what information from the on‐board computer is to be displayed on the infodisplay of the instrument cluster.

1. "Settings"2. "Instr. cluster display"3. Select the desired displays.

Information in detail

RangeDisplays the estimated cruising range availablewith the remaining fuel.It is calculated based on your driving style overthe last 20 miles/30 km.

GREEN infoDescription of GREEN info, refer to page 158.

Average fuel consumptionThis is calculated for the period during whichthe engine is running.The average fuel consumption is calculated forthe distance traveled since the last reset by theonboard computer.

Seite 79

Displays CONTROLS

79Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 80: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Average speedPeriods in which the vehicle is parked with theengine manually stopped are not included inthe calculation of the average speed.

Resetting average valuesPress and hold the onboard computer buttonon the turn signal lever.

Distance to destinationThe distance remaining to the destination isdisplayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐gation system before the trip is started.The distance to the destination is adopted au‐tomatically.

Time of arrivalThe estimated time of arrival is displayed if adestination is entered in the navigation systembefore the trip is started.The time must be correctly set.

Speed limit detectionDescription of the speed limit detection, referto page 77, function.

Trip computerThe vehicle features two types of computer.▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as

often as necessary.▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an

overview of the current trip.

Resetting the trip computer1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Trip computer"3. "Reset": all values are reset.

"Automatically reset": all values are resetapprox. 4 hours after the vehicle comes toa standstill.

Display on the Control DisplayDisplay the onboard computer or trip computeron the Control Display.

1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Resetting the fuel consumption andspeed1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Onboard info"3. "Consumpt." or "Speed"4. "Yes"

Driving ExcitementThe conceptOn the Control Display, sport instruments canbe displayed, and the vehicle condition can bechecked before the use of the SPORT program.

Sport instrumentsOn the Control Display, values for power andtorque are displayed.

Displaying sport instrumentsVia onboard monitor:

1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Driving Excitement"3. "Sports instruments"Via the Driving Dynamics Control

1. Activating SPORT.2. "Driving Excitement"3. "Sports instruments"

Vehicle stateThe following vehicle and surrounding areadata are automatically checked and evaluatedin succession:▷ Range.

Seite 80

CONTROLS Displays

80 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 81: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

▷ Engine temperature.▷ External temperature.▷ SPORT program state.Finally, a total evaluation of the vehicle state isdisplayed.

Checking vehicle stateVia onboard monitor:

1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Driving Excitement"3. "Vehicle and surroundings"Via the Driving Dynamics Control

1. Activating SPORT.2. "Driving Excitement"3. "Vehicle and surroundings"

Speed warningThe conceptDisplay of a speed limit which, when reached,should cause a warning to be issued.The warning is repeated if the vehicle speeddrops below the set speed limit once by at least3 mph/5 km/h.

Displaying, setting or changing thelimit1. "Settings"2. "Speed"3. "Warning at:"4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is

displayed.5. Press the controller.The speed limit is stored.

Activating/deactivating the limit1. "Settings"2. "Speed"

3. "Warning"4. Press the controller.

Setting your current speed as the limit1. "Settings"2. "Speed"3. "Select current speed"4. Press the controller.

The current vehicle speed is stored as thelimit.

Settings on the ControlDisplayTime

Setting the time zone1. "Settings"2. "Time/Date"3. "Time zone"4. Select the desired time zone.The time zone is stored.

Setting the time1. "Settings"2. "Time/Date"3. "Time:"4. Turn the controller until the desired hours

are displayed.5. Press the controller.6. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐

nutes are displayed.7. Press the controller.The time is stored.

Setting the time format1. "Settings"2. "Time/Date"

Seite 81

Displays CONTROLS

81Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 82: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

3. "Format:"4. Select the desired format.The time format is stored.

Date

Setting the date1. "Settings"2. "Time/Date"3. "Date:"4. Turn the controller until the desired day is

displayed.5. Press the controller.6. Make the necessary settings for the month

and year.The date is stored.

Setting the date format1. "Settings"2. "Time/Date"3. "Format:"4. Select the desired format.The date format is stored.

Language

Setting the languageTo set the language on the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Language/Units"3. "Language:"4. Select the desired language.The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

Setting the voice dialogVoice dialog for the voice activation system, re‐fer to page 27.

Setting the voice activation languageInput language for the voice activation system,refer to page 27.

Units of measure

Setting the units of measureTo set the units for fuel consumption, route/distance and temperature:

1. "Settings"2. "Language/Units"3. Select the desired menu item.4. Select the desired unit.The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

Brightness

Setting the brightnessTo set the brightness of the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Control display"3. "Brightness"4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐

ness is set.5. Press the controller.The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐ness control may not be clearly visible.

LED ring on the centralinstrument clusterThe conceptThe LED ring displays light animations to repre‐sent specific functions.

Seite 82

CONTROLS Displays

82 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 83: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Basic displaysBasic functions, for example the tachometer,can be set to be displayed continually if de‐sired.

Event displaysFunctions that are only displayed temporarily,for example the volume or temperature set‐tings, can be set as event displays.Several vehicle assistance functions can also bedisplayed on the LED ring. The display here cor‐responds to the displays of the function in therespective display.

Example: tachometerLike the tachometer in the instrument cluster,the light animations of the tachometer basicdisplay show the current RPMs and the warningfield of the permitted RPM range.

Display

▷ Arrow 1: current RPM.▷ Arrow 2: prewarning field.▷ Arrow 3: warning field.

Switching on/off LED ring1. "Settings"2. "Center Instrument"3. "Center Instrument"

Adjusting the LED ring1. "Settings"2. "Center Instrument"

3. "Basic display" or "Event display"4. Select the desired setting.

Setting the brightnessThe brightness can be adjusted when nightlighting is active in the instrument cluster.

1. "Settings"2. "Center Instrument"3. "Brightness"4. Turn the controller.The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

Head-up DisplayThe concept

This system projects important information intothe driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed.The driver can quickly absorb information andconcentrate on the traffic situation.

HintsDo not move the moving parts manuallyDo not move the moving parts manually,

and keep the area of movement of these partsclear; otherwise, the system is damaged.◀

Do not place objects on the Head-up Dis‐play

Do not place any objects on the Head-up Dis‐play, attach them to components of the system

Seite 83

Displays CONTROLS

83Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 84: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

or insert them in the system, or else the systemcan be damaged.◀

Follow the instructions for cleaning the Head-up Display, refer to page 210.

Display visibilityThe visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐play is influenced by the following factors:▷ Certain sitting positions.▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐

play.▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.▷ Wet roads.▷ Unfavorable light conditions.

Switching on/offWhen switching on, the projection lens of theHead-up Display is extended. When switchingoff, the projection lens of the Head-up Displayis retracted again.

Press the button.

Display

Overview▷ Speed.▷ Navigation system.▷ Check Control messages.▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster.▷ Speed limit detection.▷ Driver assistance systems.

Some of this information is only displayedbriefly as needed.

Selecting displays in the Head-upDisplay1. "Settings"2. "Head-Up Display"3. "Displayed information"4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up

Display.The settings are stored for the remote controlcurrently in use.

Setting the brightnessThe brightness is automatically adjusted to theambient light.The basic setting can be adjusted manually.

1. "Settings"2. "Head-Up Display"3. "Brightness"4. Turn the controller.When the low beams are switched on, thebrightness of the Head-up Display can be addi‐tionally influenced using the instrument light‐ing, refer to page 89.The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

Adjusting the height1. "Settings"2. "Head-Up Display"3. "Height"4. Turn the controller.The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

Setting the rotation1. "Settings"2. "Head-Up Display"

Seite 84

CONTROLS Displays

84 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 85: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

3. "Rotation"4. Turn the controller.The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

Seite 85

Displays CONTROLS

85Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 86: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

LampsVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equipmentis also described that is not available in a vehi‐cle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

At a glance

1 Rear fog lamps2 Front fog lamps3 Automatic headlamp control, cornering

lamps, High-beam Assistant, welcomelamps, daytime running lights

4 Lamps off, daytime running lights5 Parking lamps/daytime running lights6 Low beams, welcome lamps, High-beam

Assistant7 Instrument lighting

Parking lamps, corneringlamps and roadsideparking lampsParking lampsSwitch position : the vehicle lamps lightup on all sides, e.g., for parking.Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe‐riods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐charged and it would then be impossible tostart the engine.When parking, it is preferable to switch on theone-sided roadside parking lamps.

Low beamsSwitch position with the ignition switchedon: the low beams light up.

Roadside parking lamps

The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.

Switching onWith the ignition switched off, press the levereither up or down past the resistance point forapprox. 2 seconds.

Switching offBriefly press the lever to the resistance point inthe opposite direction.

Seite 86

CONTROLS Lamps

86 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 87: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Welcome lamps andheadlamp courtesy de‐lay featureWelcome lampsWhen the vehicle is parked, leave the switch inposition or : parking and interior lampscome on briefly when the vehicle is unlockeddepending on the ambient light.

Activating/deactivating1. "Settings"2. "Lighting"3. "Welcome lights"The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

Headlamp courtesy delay featureThe low beams stay lit for a short while if theheadlamp flasher is switched on after the lightsand ignition are switched off.

Setting the duration1. "Settings"2. "Lighting"3. "Pathway lighting:"4. Set the duration.The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

Automatic headlampcontrolSwitch position : the low beams areswitched on and off automatically, e.g., in tun‐nels, in twilight or if there is precipitation. Theindicator lamp in the instrument cluster lightsup.A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon cancause the lights to be switched on.

The low beams always stay on when the foglamps are switched on.

Personal responsibilityThe automatic headlamp control cannot

serve as a substitute for your personal judg‐ment in determining when the lamps should beswitched on in response to ambient lightingconditions.For example, the sensors are unable to detectfog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, youshould always switch on the lamps manuallyunder these conditions.◀

Daytime running lightsWith the ignition switched on, the daytime run‐ning lights light up in position 0, or .After the ignition is switched off, the parkinglamps light up in position .

Activating/deactivatingIn some countries, daytime running lights arecompulsory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐vate the daytime running lights.

1. "Settings"2. "Lighting"3. "Daytime running lamps"The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

Cornering lampSwitch position : during cornering, the cor‐nering lamp also lights the interior area of thecurve. Below a speed of approx.25 mph/40 km/h when the flasher is switchedon and the steering angle is detected, there isautomatic activation.

MalfunctionA Check Control message is displayed.

Seite 87

Lamps CONTROLS

87Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 88: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Cornering light is disrupted or failed. Have thesystem checked as soon as possible.

High-beam AssistantThe conceptWhen the low beams are switched on, this sys‐tem automatically switches the high beams onand off. The procedure is controlled by a sensoron the front of the interior rearview mirror. Theassistant ensures that the high beams areswitched on whenever the traffic situation al‐lows. The driver can intervene at any time andswitch the high beams on and off as usual.

Activating

The High-beam Assistant can be activatedwhen the low beams are switched on.

1. Turn the light switch to or .2. Press the button on the turn signal lever,

arrow.The indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.

When the low beams are on, the lights are au‐tomatically brightened or dimmed.The system responds to light from oncomingtraffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and toadequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.

The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐ment cluster lights up when the systemswitches on the high beams.

Switching the high beams on and offmanually

▷ High beams on, arrow 1.▷ High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2.

The High-beam Assistant can be switched offwhen manually adjusting the light. To reacti‐vate the High-beam Assistant, press the buttonon the turn signal lever.

System limitsPersonal responsibilityThe high-beam assistant cannot serve as

a substitute for the driver's personal judgmentof when to use the high beams. Therefore,manually switch off the high beams in situa‐tions where this is required to avoid a safetyrisk.◀

The system is not fully functional in situationssuch as the following, and driver interventionmay be necessary:▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,

such as fog or heavy precipitation.▷ In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as

pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders andwagons; when driving close to train or shiptraffic; and at animal crossings.

▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,in cross traffic or half-obscured oncomingtraffic on freeways.

▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in thepresence of highly reflective signs.

▷ At low speeds.

Seite 88

CONTROLS Lamps

88 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 89: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

▷ When the windshield behind the interiorrearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ered with stickers, etc.

Camera

The camera is located near the base of the mir‐ror.Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐terior rearview mirror clean and clear.

Fog lampsFront fog lampsThe low beams must be switched on.

Press the button. The green indicatorlamp lights up.

If the automatic headlamp control, refer topage 87, is activated, the low beams will comeon automatically when you switch on the frontfog lamps.

Rear fog lampsThe low beams or front fog lamps must beswitched on.

Press the button. The yellow indicatorlamp lights up.

If the automatic headlamp control, refer topage 87, is activated, the low beams will comeon automatically when you switch on the rearfog lamps.

Right-hand/left-handtrafficHalogen headlampsWhen crossing over into countries in whichdriving takes place on the other side of theroad than in the country in which the vehicle isregistered, measures must be taken to preventthe blinding effect of the headlamps. The serv‐ice center can provide the necessary maskingfilm. Adhere to the following instructions whenapplying the film.

LED headlampsThe light distribution of LED headlamps reducesthe blinding effect when driving in a country inwhich driving takes place on the other side ofthe road than in the country of registration.

Instrument lightingAdjusting

The parking lamps or low beamsmust be switched on to adjustthe brightness.Adjust the brightness using thethumbwheel.

Interior lampsGeneral informationThe interior lamps, footwell lamps, entry lampsand courtesy lamps are controlled automati‐cally.The brightness of some of these lamps is influ‐enced by the thumbwheel for the instrumentlighting.

Seite 89

Lamps CONTROLS

89Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 90: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

1 Interior lamps2 Reading lamp3 Ambient light

Switching the interior lamps on and offPress the button.

To switch off permanently: press the button forapprox. 3 seconds.Switch back on: press button.

Reading lampsPress the button.

Reading lamps are located at the front and rearnext to the interior lamps.

Ambient lightDepending on the equipment, the lighting canbe adjusted in the interior for some lights.

Changing colorPush the switch forward or back:manual color change.

Push and hold the switch forward orback: automatic color change. Push

the switch again to end the color changing.

Setting the brightnessThe brightness of the ambient light can be ad‐justed via the thumbwheel for the instrumentlighting or on the Control Display.

1. "Settings"2. "Lighting"3. "Brightness:"4. Adjust the brightness.

Seite 90

CONTROLS Lamps

90 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 91: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

SafetyVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equipment

is also described that is not available in a vehi‐cle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

Airbags

1 Front airbag, driver2 Front airbag, front passenger3 Head airbag

4 Side airbag5 Knee airbags

Front airbagsFront airbags help protect the driver and frontpassenger by responding to frontal impacts inwhich safety belts alone cannot provide ade‐quate restraint.

Side airbagsIn a lateral impact, the side airbag supports theside of the body in the chest and lap area.

Head airbagsIn a lateral impact, the head airbag supportsthe head.

Knee airbagThe knee airbag supports the legs in a frontalimpact.

Seite 91

Safety CONTROLS

91Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 92: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Protective actionAirbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-endcollisions.

Information on how to ensure the opti‐mal protective effect of the airbags

▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the

steering wheel rim, holding your hands atthe 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, tokeep the danger of injury to your hands orarms as low as possible if the airbag is trig‐gered.

▷ There should be no people, animals, or ob‐jects between an airbag and a person.

▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag onthe front passenger side as a storage area.

▷ Keep the dashboard and window on thefront passenger side clear, i.e. do not coverwith adhesive labels or coverings, and donot attach holders such as for navigation in‐struments and mobile phones.

▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sittingcorrectly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legsin the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries canoccur if the front airbag is triggered.

▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions orother objects on the front passenger seatthat are not approved specifically for seatswith integrated side airbags.

▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such asjackets, over the backrests.

▷ Make sure that occupants keep their headsaway from the side airbag and do not restagainst the head airbag; otherwise, injuriescan occur if the airbags are triggered.

▷ Do not remove the airbag restraint system.▷ Do not remove the steering wheel.▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐

bag cover panels, cover them or modifythem in any way.

▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐nents or the wiring in the airbag system.This also applies to steering wheel covers,the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillarsand the sides of the headliner.◀

Even when all instructions are followed closely,injury from contact with the airbags cannot beruled out in certain situations.The ignition and inflation noise may lead toshort-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐ing impairment in sensitive individuals.

In the case of a malfunction, deactivationand after triggering of the airbags

Do not touch the individual components imme‐diately after the system has been triggered;otherwise, there is the danger of burns.Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐mantled and the airbag generator scrapped bythe service center or a workshop that has thenecessary authorization for handling explo‐sives.Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐tem could lead to failure in an emergency orundesired triggering of the airbag, either ofwhich could result in injury.◀

Warnings and information on the airbags arealso found on the sun visors.

Functional readiness of the airbagsystem

When the ignition is switched on, thewarning lamp in the instrument clusterlights up briefly and thereby indicates

the operational readiness of the entire airbagsystem and the belt tensioner.

Airbag system malfunctioning▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the

ignition is turned on.▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously.

Seite 92

CONTROLS Safety

92 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 93: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

When there is a malfunction, have the air‐bag system checked immediately

When there is a malfunction, have the airbagsystem checked immediately; otherwise, thereis a risk that the system does not function asexpected in the event of an accident despitecorresponding severity of the accident.◀

Automatic deactivation of the frontpassenger airbagsThe system determines whether the front pas‐senger seat is occupied by measuring the re‐sistance of the human body.The front, knee, and side airbag on the frontpassenger side are activated or deactivated ac‐cordingly.

Leave feet in the footwellMake sure that the front passenger keeps

his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, thefront passenger airbags may not function prop‐erly.◀

Child restraint fixing system in the frontpassenger seat

Before transporting a child on the front passen‐ger seat, refer to the safety notes and instruc‐tions under Children on the front passengerseat.◀

Malfunction of the automaticdeactivation systemWhen transporting older children and adults,the front passenger airbags may be deactivatedin certain sitting positions. In this case, the indi‐cator lamp for the front passenger airbagslights up.In this case, change the sitting position so thatthe front passenger airbags are activated andthe indicator lamp goes out.If it is not possible to activate the airbags, havethe person sit in the rear.To make sure that the occupied seat cushioncan be evaluated correctly

▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats orother items to the front passenger seat un‐less they are specifically recommended bythe manufacturer of your vehicle.

▷ Do not place any electronic devices on thepassenger seat if a child restraint system isto be installed on it.

▷ Do not place objects under the seat thatcould press against the seat from below.

▷ No moisture in or on the seat.

Indicator lamp for the front passengerairbags

The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐bags indicates the operating state of the frontpassenger airbags.The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac‐tivated or deactivated.

▷ The indicator lamp lights upwhen a child who is properlyseated in a child restraint fix‐ing system intended for thatpurpose is detected on theseat or the seat is empty. Theairbags on the front passen‐ger side are not activated.

▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,for example, a correctly seated person ofsufficient size is detected on the seat. Theairbags on the front passenger side are ac‐tivated.

Seite 93

Safety CONTROLS

93Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 94: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Detected child seatsThe system generally detects children seated ina child seat, especially in the child seats thatwere required by NHTSA when the vehicle wasmanufactured. After installing a child seat,make sure that the indicator lamp for the frontpassenger airbags lights up. This indicates thatthe child seat has been detected and the frontpassenger airbags are not activated.

Strength of the driver's and frontpassenger airbagThe strength with which the driver's and frontpassenger airbags are triggered depends onthe position of the driver's and front passengerseats.To maintain the accuracy of this function overthe long-term, calibrate the front seats when acorresponding message appears on the ControlDisplay.

Calibrating the front seatsA corresponding message appears on the Con‐trol Display.

1. Move the respective seat forward all theway.

2. Move the respective seat forward again. Itmoves forward briefly.

3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.The calibration procedure is completed whenthe message on the Control Display disappears.If the message continues to be displayed, re‐peat the calibration.If the message does not disappear after a re‐peat calibration, have the system checked assoon as possible.

Unobstructed area of movementEnsure that the area of movement of the

seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injuryor damage to objects.◀

Tire Pressure MonitorTPMThe conceptThe system monitors tire pressure in the fourmounted tires. The system warns you if there isa significant loss of pressure in one or moretires. For this purpose, sensors in the tire valvesmeasure the tire inflation pressure.

HintsTire damage due to external factorsSudden tire damage caused by external

influences cannot be indicated in advance.◀

Pay attention to the other information and indi‐cations under Tire inflation pressure, refer topage 168, as well when using the system.

Functional requirementsThe system must have been reset with the cor‐rect tire inflation pressure; otherwise, reliablesignaling of tire pressure loss is not ensured.Reset the system after each adjustment of thetire inflation pressure and after every tire orwheel change.Always use wheels with TPM electronics to en‐sure that the system will operate properly.

Status displayOn the onboard monitor, the current status ofthe Tire Pressure Monitor TPM can be dis‐played, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.

1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)"The status is displayed.

Status displayThe tire and system status is indicated by thecolor of the tires and a text message on theControl Display.

Seite 94

CONTROLS Safety

94 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 95: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

All wheels greenSystem is active and will issue a warning rela‐tive to the tire inflation pressures stored duringthe last reset.

One wheel is yellowA flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure inthe indicated tire.

All wheels are yellowA flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure inseveral tires.

Wheels, grayThe system cannot detect a flat tire due to amalfunction.

Status informationThe status display additionally shows the cur‐rent tire inflation pressures. The values shownare current measurement values and may varydepending on driving style or weather condi‐tions.

Carry out resetReset the system after each adjustment of thetire inflation pressure and after every tire orwheel change.

1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Perform reset"4. Start the engine - do not drive away.5. Reset the tire pressure using "Perform

reset".6. Drive away.The tires are shown in gray and the status isdisplayed.After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for ashort period, the tire inflation pressures set areaccepted as reference values. The resettingprocess is completed automatically during driv‐ing. After successful completion of the reset,

the tires appear in green on the Control Displayand "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) active" is dis‐played.The progress of the reset is displayed.The trip can be interrupted at any time. If youdrive away again, the reset resumes automati‐cally.

Low tire pressure messageThe yellow warning lamp lights up. ACheck Control message is displayed.▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in

tire inflation pressure.▷ A reset of the system was not carried out

after a wheel was changed. The systemtherefore issues a warning based on the tirepressures before the last reset.

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐vers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted withregular tires or run-flat tires.Run-flat tires, refer to page 175, are la‐beled with a circular symbol containing theletters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.

Do not continue driving without run-flattires

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is notequipped with run-flat tires; continued drivingmay result in serious accidents.◀

When a low inflation pressure is indicated, DSCDynamic Stability Control is switched on if nec‐essary.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires1. Identify the damaged tire.

Do this by checking the air pressure in allfour tires.

Seite 95

Safety CONTROLS

95Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 96: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

The tire pressure gauge of the Mobility Sys‐tem, refer to page 175, can be used for thispurpose.If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires iscorrect, the Tire Pressure Monitor may nothave been initialized. In this case, initializethe system.If an identification is not possible, pleasecontact the service center.

2. Fix the flat tire using the Mobility System,refer to page 175.

Run-flat tires

Maximum speedYou can continue driving with a damaged tireat speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tireIf continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the

next opportunity.If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires iscorrect, it is possible that a reset was notcarried out for the Tire Pressure Monitor. Inthat case, carry out a reset.

Possible driving distance with complete loss oftire inflation pressure:The possible driving distance after a loss of tireinflation pressure depends on the cargo loadand the driving style and conditions.For a vehicle containing an average load, thepossible driving distance is approx.50 miles/80 km.When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐duced lane stability during braking, a longerbraking distance, and altered self-steeringproperties. Adjust your driving style accord‐

ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc.Because the possible driving distance dependson how the vehicle is used during the trip, theactual distance may be smaller or greater de‐pending on the driving speed, road conditions,external temperature, cargo load, etc.

Continued driving with a flat tireDrive moderately and do not exceed a

speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.A loss of tire inflation pressure results in achange in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐duced lane stability during braking, a longerbraking distance and altered self-steering prop‐erties.◀

Final tire failureVibrations or loud noises while driving

can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reducespeed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tirecould come loose and cause an accident. Donot continue driving, and contact your servicecenter.◀

Required inflation pressure checkmessageA Check Control message is displayed in the fol‐lowing situations▷ The system has detected a wheel change,

but no reset was carried out.▷ Inflation was not carried out according to

specifications.▷ The tire pressure has fallen below the level

of the last confirmation.In this case:▷ Check the tire pressure and correct as

needed.▷ Carry out a reset of the system after a tire

change.

Seite 96

CONTROLS Safety

96 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 97: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

System limitsThe system does not function properly if a resethas not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is re‐ported even though the tire inflation pressuresare correct.The tire pressure depends on the temperatureof the tire. If the tire temperature rises, e.g.,due to driving or because of the heat of theSun, the tire inflation pressure increases also.The tire pressure is reduced when the tire tem‐perature falls again. This behavior may cause awarning to be issued if temperatures fall verysharply.

MalfunctionThe yellow warning lamp flashes andthen lights up continuously. A CheckControl message is displayed. No flat

tire or loss of tire pressure can be detected.Display in the following situations:▷ A wheel without TPM electronics, such as a

compact wheel, is mounted: have the serv‐ice center check it if necessary.

▷ Malfunction: have the system checked byyour service center.

▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. Re‐set the system again.

▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with thesame radio frequency: after leaving thearea of the disturbance, the system auto‐matically becomes active again.

Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS138 Tire Pressure Monitoring SystemEach tire, including the spare (if provided)should be checked monthly when cold and in‐flated to the inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressure label. (If yourvehicle has tires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label, you should determine theproper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) Asan added safety feature, your vehicle has been

equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys‐tem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale when one or more of your tires is signifi‐cantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when thelow tire pressure telltale illuminates, you shouldstop and check your tires as soon as possible,and inflate them to the proper pressure. Drivingon a significantly under-inflated tire causes thetire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Un‐der-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency andtire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's han‐dling and stopping ability. Please note that theTPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte‐nance, and it is the driver's responsibility tomaintain correct tire pressure, even if under-in‐flation has not reached the level to trigger illu‐mination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe system is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with the lowtire pressure telltale. When the system detectsa malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi‐mately one minute and then remain continu‐ously illuminated. This sequence will continueupon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long asthe malfunction exists. When the malfunctionindicator is illuminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tire pressure as in‐tended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a va‐riety of reasons, including the installation of re‐placement or alternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioningproperly. Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or more tires orwheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re‐placement or alternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to function properly.

FTM Flat Tire MonitorThe conceptThe system does not measure the actual infla‐tion pressure in the tires.

Seite 97

Safety CONTROLS

97Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 98: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

It detects a pressure loss in a tire by comparingthe rotational speeds of the individual wheelswhile moving.In the event of a pressure loss, the diameterand therefore the rotational speed of the corre‐sponding wheel change. This is detected andreported as a flat tire.

Functional requirementsThe system must have been initialized whenthe tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐wise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not en‐sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐tion of the tire inflation pressure and afterevery tire or wheel change.

Status displayThe current status of the Flat Tire Monitor canbe displayed on the Control Display, e.g.,whether or not the FTM is active.

1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)"The status is displayed.

InitializationThe initialization process adopts the set infla‐tion tire pressures as reference values for thedetection of a flat tire. Initialization is started byconfirming the inflation pressures.Do not initialize the system when driving withsnow chains.

1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Perform reset"4. Start the engine - do not drive away.5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset".6. Drive away.The initialization is completed while driving,which can be interrupted at any time.

The initialization automatically continues whendriving resumes.

Indication of a flat tireThe yellow warning lamp lights up. ACheck Control message is displayed.There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire

inflation pressure.

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐vers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted withregular tires or run-flat tires.Run-flat tires, refer to page 175, are la‐beled with a circular symbol containing theletters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.

Do not continue driving without run-flattires

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is notequipped with run-flat tires; continued drivingmay result in serious accidents.◀

When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐bility Control is switched on if necessary.

System limitsSudden tire damageSudden serious tire damage caused by

external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐vance.◀

A natural, even pressure loss in all four tirescannot be detected. Therefore, check the tireinflation pressure regularly.The system could be delayed or malfunction inthe following situations:▷ When the system has not been initialized.▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road

surface.▷ Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels,

high lateral acceleration.▷ When driving with snow chains.

Seite 98

CONTROLS Safety

98 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 99: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires1. Identify the damaged tire.

Do this by checking the air pressure in allfour tires.The tire pressure gauge of the Mobility Sys‐tem, refer to page 175, can be used for thispurpose.If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires iscorrect, the Flat Tire Monitor may not havebeen initialized. In this case, initialize thesystem.If an identification is not possible, pleasecontact the service center.

2. Rectify the flat tire using the Mobility Sys‐tem, refer to page 175.

Run-flat tires

Maximum speedYou can continue driving with a damaged tireat speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tireIf continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the

next opportunity.If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires iscorrect, the Flat Tire Monitor may not havebeen initialized. In this case, initialize thesystem.

Possible driving distance with complete loss oftire inflation pressure:The possible driving distance after a loss of tireinflation pressure depends on the cargo loadand the driving style and conditions.

For a vehicle containing an average load, thepossible driving distance is approx.50 miles/80 km.When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐duced lane stability during braking, a longerbraking distance, and altered self-steeringproperties. Adjust your driving style accord‐ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc.Because the possible driving distance dependson how the vehicle is used during the trip, theactual distance may be smaller or greater de‐pending on the driving speed, road conditions,external temperature, cargo load, etc.

Continued driving with a flat tireDrive moderately and do not exceed a

speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.A loss of tire inflation pressure results in achange in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐duced lane stability during braking, a longerbraking distance and altered self-steering prop‐erties.◀

Final tire failureVibrations or loud noises while driving

can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reducespeed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tirecould come loose and cause an accident. Donot continue driving, and contact your servicecenter.◀

Intelligent SafetyThe conceptThe intelligent safety systems can help to pre‐vent an imminent collision.▷ Collision warning with City Braking function,

refer to page 100.▷ Pedestrian warning with city braking func‐

tion, refer to page 103

Seite 99

Safety CONTROLS

99Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 100: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

NotePersonal responsibilityThe system does not serve as a substitute

for the driver's personal judgment of the trafficsituation.Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise an ac‐cident is still possible despite all warnings.◀

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Switching on/offSome Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐cally active after each engine start via the start/stop button. Some Intelligent Safety systemsactivate according to the last setting.

Press the button:The menu for the intelligent safety sys‐

tem is displayed. Adjustments can be made.The individual settings are stored for the re‐mote control currently in use.

Press the button briefly:▷ Intelligent Safety systems are indi‐

vidually switched off according toindividual setting.

▷ LED lights up orange or goes out depend‐ing on the individual setting.

Press the button again:

▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are switchedon.

▷ The LED lights up green.

Hold the button down:▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are

switched off.▷ The LED goes out.

Collision warning withCity Braking functionThe conceptThe system can help to prevent accidents. If anaccident cannot be prevented, the systemhelps to reduce the collision speed.The system issues a warning if there is immi‐nent danger of a collision and if so brakes inde‐pendently.The automatic braking intervention is donewith limited force and duration.The system is controlled via a camera in thebase of the mirror.The collision warning is available even if cruisecontrol has been deactivated.When the vehicle is intentionally brought closeto a vehicle, the collision warning is delayed toavoid false warnings.

General informationThe system issues a two-phase warning of adanger of collision with vehicles at speedsabove approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The time ofthese warnings may vary depending on thecurrent driving situation.Up to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h a braking inter‐vention occurs when appropriate.

Seite 100

CONTROLS Safety

100 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 101: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Detection range

Vehicles are observed when they are travelingin the same direction of movement if they arelocated within the detection range of the sys‐tem.

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

The camera is located near the base of the mir‐ror.

Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐terior rearview mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automaticallyThe system is automatically active every timethe engine is started using the Start/Stop but‐ton.

Switching on/off manuallyPress the button: the menu for the in‐telligent safety system is displayed. Ad‐

justments can be made. The individual settingsare stored for the remote control currently inuse.Press the button briefly:▷ Intelligent Safety systems are individually

switched off according to individual setting.▷ The LED lights up orange.Press the button again:▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are switched

on.▷ The LED lights up green.Hold the button down:▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are switched

off.▷ The LED goes out.

Setting the warning timeThe warning time can be set via the onboardmonitor.

1. "Settings"2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"3. Activate the desired warning time on the

Control Display.The selected channel is stored for the remotecontrol currently in use.

Seite 101

Safety CONTROLS

101Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 102: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Warning with braking function

NoteAdapting your speed and driving styleThe warning does not relieve the driver of

the responsibility to adapt his or her drivingspeed and style to the traffic conditions.◀

DisplayIf a collision with a vehicle detected in this wayis imminent, a warning symbol appears on theinstrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.Symbol Measure

The vehicle lights up red: prewarning.Increase braking and distance.

The vehicle flashes red and an acous‐tic signal sounds: acute warning.You are requested to intervene bybraking or making an evasive maneu‐ver.

Braking interventionThe warning prompts the driver himself to in‐tervene. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ing force is used. A prerequisite for the brakebooster is a sufficiently fast and sufficientlystrong actuation of the brake pedal. In addi‐tion, if there is a risk of collision, the system canassist with a slight braking intervention. The in‐tervention can bring a vehicle traveling at slowspeed to a complete stop.Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐vention up until reaching a complete stop, theengine may be shut down.The braking intervention is executed only if DSCDynamic Stability Control is switched on andDynamic Traction Control DTC is activated.The braking intervention can be interrupted bypressing on the accelerator pedal or by activelymoving the steering wheel.

Tow-starting and towingWhen tow-starting and towing the vehi‐

cle, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems;otherwise, improper behavior of the brakingfunction of individual systems could result in anaccident.◀

System limitsBe alertDue to system limitations, warnings may

be not be issued at all, or may be issued late orimproperly. Therefore, always be alert andready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan‐ger of an accident occurring.◀

Detection rangeThe system's detection capabilities are limited.This may result in the warning not being issuedor being issued late.For example, the following situations may notbe detected:▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach

them at high speed.▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of

you or sharply decelerating vehicles.▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.▷ Pedestrians.

Functional limitationsThe system may not be fully functional in thefollowing situations:▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐

fall.▷ In tight curves.▷ If the driving stability control systems are

limited or deactivated, for example, DSCOFF.

▷ If the camera in the mirror is dirty or ob‐scured.

Seite 102

CONTROLS Safety

102 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 103: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ately after vehicle shipment.

▷ If there is constant dimming because of on‐coming light, for example, from the sun lowin the sky.

Prewarning sensitivityDepending on the set prewarning time, thismay result in increased false warnings.

Pedestrian warning withcity braking functionThe conceptThe system can help to prevent accidents withpedestrians.The system issues a warning in the city drivingspeed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐lision with pedestrians and includes a brakingfunction.The system is controlled via the camera in thebase of the interior mirror.

General informationThe system issues a warning with brightnessstaring at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx.35 mph/60 km/h regarding a possible risk ofcollision with pedestrians and assists with abrake intervention shortly before a collision.It responds to persons that are within the de‐tection range of the system.

Detection range

The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐ided into two areas.▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the

vehicle.▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and

left.A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐cated within the central area. A warning is is‐sued about pedestrians who are located withinthe extended area only if they are moving inthe direction of the central area.

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Seite 103

Safety CONTROLS

103Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 104: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Camera

The camera is located near the base of the mir‐ror.Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐terior rearview mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automaticallyThe system is automatically active every timethe engine is started using the Start/Stop but‐ton.

Switching on/off manuallyPress the button: the menu for the in‐telligent safety system is displayed. Ad‐

justments can be made. The individual settingsare stored for the remote control currently inuse.Press the button briefly:▷ Intelligent Safety systems are individually

switched off according to individual setting.▷ The LED lights up orange.Press the button again:▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are switched

on.▷ The LED lights up green.Hold the button down:▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are switched

off.▷ The LED goes out.

Warning with braking function

NoteAdapting your speed and driving styleThe warning does not relieve the driver of

the responsibility to adapt his or her drivingspeed and style to the traffic conditions.◀

DisplayIf a collision with a person detected in this wayis imminent, a warning symbol appears on theinstrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.

The red symbol is displayed and a signalsounds.Intervene immediately by braking or

making an evasive maneuver.

Braking interventionThe warning prompts the driver himself to in‐tervene. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ing force is used. A prerequisite for the brakebooster is a sufficiently fast and sufficientlystrong actuation of the brake pedal. In addi‐tion, if there is a risk of collision, the system canassist with a slight braking intervention. The in‐tervention can bring a vehicle traveling at slowspeed to a complete stop.Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐vention up until reaching a complete stop, theengine may be shut down.The braking intervention is executed only if DSCDynamic Stability Control is switched on andDynamic Traction Control DTC is activated.The braking intervention can be interrupted bypressing on the accelerator pedal or by activelymoving the steering wheel.

Tow-starting and towingWhen tow-starting and towing the vehi‐

cle, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems;otherwise, improper behavior of the brakingfunction of individual systems could result in anaccident.◀

Seite 104

CONTROLS Safety

104 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 105: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

System limitsBe alertDue to system limitations, warnings may

be not be issued at all, or may be issued late orimproperly. Therefore, always be alert andready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan‐ger of an accident occurring.◀

Detection rangeThe detection capability of the camera is lim‐ited.This may result in the warning not being issuedor being issued late.For example, the following situations may notbe detected:▷ Partially covered pedestrians.▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such

because of the viewing angle or contour.▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than

32 in/80 cm.

Functional limitationsThe system may not be fully functional or maynot be available in the following situations:▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐

fall.▷ In tight curves.▷ If the camera view field or the front wind‐

shield are dirty or covered.▷ When driving toward bright lights.▷ Up to 20 seconds after the start of the en‐

gine, via the Start/Stop knob.▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐

ately after vehicle shipment.▷ When it is dark outside.

Brake force displayThe concept

▷ During normal brake application, the brakelamps light up.

▷ During heavy brake application, the flash‐ers light up in addition.

Seite 105

Safety CONTROLS

105Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 106: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Driving stability control systemsVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equipmentis also described that is not available in a vehi‐cle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

Antilock Brake SystemABSABS prevents locking of the wheels duringbraking.The vehicle remains steerable even during fullbrake applications, thus increasing activesafety.ABS is operational every time you start the en‐gine.

Brake assistantWhen you apply the brakes rapidly, this systemautomatically produces the maximum brakingforce boost. This then reduces braking distanceto a minimum during full braking. This systemutilizes all of the benefits provided by ABS.Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedalfor the duration of the full braking.

DSC Dynamic StabilityControlThe conceptDSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheelswhen driving away and accelerating.

DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Subjectto physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicleon a steady course by reducing engine speedand by applying brakes to the individualwheels.

Adjust your driving style to the situationAn appropriate driving style is always the

responsibility of the driver.The laws of physics cannot be repealed, evenwith DSC.Therefore, do not reduce the additional safetymargin by driving in a risky manner.◀

Indicator/warning lampsThe indicator lamp flashes: DSC controlsthe drive forces and brake forces.The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has

failed.

Deactivating DSC: DSC OFFWhen DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐duced during acceleration and when driving inbends.To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC againas soon as possible.

Deactivating DSCPress and hold the button, but not lon‐ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the

indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐strument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed.The DSC system is switched off.

Activating DSCPress the button.

Seite 106

CONTROLS Driving stability control systems

106 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 107: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator lamp goout.

Indicator/warning lampsWhen DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayedin the instrument cluster.

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is de‐activated.

Automatic activationWhen DSC is deactivated, automatic activationoccurs in the following situations:▷ Failure of Dynamic Damping Control.▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.▷ When activating cruise control in TRACTION

or DSC OFF mode.

DTC Dynamic TractionControlThe conceptThe DTC system is a version of the DSC in whichforward momentum is optimized.The system ensures maximum forward mo‐mentum on special road conditions, e.g., unp‐lowed snowy roads, but driving stability is lim‐ited.It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri‐ate caution.You may find it useful to briefly activate DTCunder the following special circumstances:▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,

snow-covered roads.▷ When rocking the vehicle or driving off in

deep snow or on loose surfaces.▷ When driving with snow chains.

Deactivating/activating DTC DynamicTraction ControlActivating the Dynamic Traction Control DTCprovides maximum traction on loose ground.TRACTION is activated. Driving stability is lim‐ited during acceleration and when driving inbends.

Activating DTCPress the button.TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐

ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSCOFF lights up.

Deactivating DTCPress the button again.TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator

lamp go out.

Performance ControlPerformance Control enhances the agility ofyour vehicle.To enhance performance during sporty driving,the front wheel on the inside of the curve isbraked while the resulting braking effect islargely compensated by engine intervention.

Dynamic Damping Con‐trolThe conceptThis system reduces undesirable vehicle motionwhen using a dynamic driving style or travelingon uneven road surfaces.The system enhances driving dynamics andcomfort as required for the road surface anddriving style.

Seite 107

Driving stability control systems CONTROLS

107Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 108: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

ProgramsThe system offers several different programs.The programs can be selected via the DrivingDynamics Control, refer to page 108.

MID/GREENBalanced control of the vehicle.

SPORTConsistently sporty control of the shock absorb‐ers for greater driving agility.

Driving Dynamics Con‐trolThe conceptThe Driving Dynamics Control can be used toadjust the certain characteristics of the vehicle.Three different programs can be selected forthis purpose. By turning the Driving DynamicsControl, a particular program can be activated.

Operating the programs

Driving Dynamics Control Program

MIDGREENSPORT

MIDFor balanced tuning.With each starting operation, MID is activatedusing the Start/Stop button.

GREENGREEN, refer to page 156, provides consistenttuning to maximize range.

Activating GREENTurn Driving Dynamics Control to the right untilGREEN is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Configuring GREEN

Via the Driving Dynamics Control1. Activate GREEN.2. "Configure GREEN"3. Configure the program.This configuration is retrieved when GREEN isactivated.

Via onboard monitor:1. "Settings"2. "GREEN Mode"Or

1. "Settings"2. "Driving mode"3. "Configure GREEN"Configure the program.This configuration is retrieved when GREEN isactivated.

SPORTConsistently sporty tuning of the body and en‐gine control for greater driving agility.Depending on the equipment version, SPORTcan be individually configured.

Activating SPORTTurn Driving Dynamics Control to the left untilSPORT is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Configuring SPORTDepending on the equipment version, whenthe display is activated on the Control Display,the SPORT driving mode can be configured forindividual specifications.Activating SPORT.Select "Configure SPORT".

Seite 108

CONTROLS Driving stability control systems

108 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 109: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Configure the program.SPORT can also be configured before it is acti‐vated:

1. "Settings"2. "Driving mode"3. "Configure SPORT"This configuration is retrieved when SPORT isactivated.

Configuring drive programSettings can be made for the following drivingprograms in Driving mode:▷ GREEN, refer to page 108.▷ SPORT, refer to page 108.

Displays

Program selectionWhen the Driving Dynamics Con‐trol is turned, a list of programsthat can be selected is displayed.

Selected programThe selected program is dis‐played in the instrument cluster.

Display on the Control DisplayProgram changes can be displayed on the Con‐trol Display.

1. "Settings"2. "Control display"3. "Driving mode info"

Drive-off assistantThis system supports driving away on gradients.The parking brake is not required.

1. Hold the vehicle in place with the footbrake.

2. Release the foot brake and drive awaywithout delay.

After the foot brake is released, the vehicle isheld in place for approx. 2 seconds.Depending on the vehicle load or when a traileris being used, the vehicle may roll back slightly.

Driving off without delayAfter releasing the foot brake, start driv‐

ing without delay, since the drive-off assistantwill not hold the vehicle in place for more thanapprox. 2 seconds and the vehicle will beginrolling back.◀

Seite 109

Driving stability control systems CONTROLS

109Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 110: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Driving comfortVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equipmentis also described that is not available in a vehi‐cle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

Camera-based cruise con‐trol, ACCThe conceptThis system can be used to select a desiredspeed that the vehicle will maintain automati‐cally on clear roads.To the extent possible, the system automati‐cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicleahead of you.A camera on the interior rear view mirror isused to detect vehicles driving ahead.The distance that the vehicle maintains to thevehicle ahead of you can be varied.For safety reasons, it depends on the speed.To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐tomatically decelerates, applies the brakeslightly, or accelerates again if the vehicle aheadbegins moving faster.As soon as the road is clear, it accelerates to thedesired speed.The speed is also maintained on downhill gradi‐ents, but may not be maintained on uphillslopes if engine power is insufficient.

General informationDepending on the set drive mode, refer topage 108, the characteristics of the cruise con‐trol can change in certain areas.

HintsPersonal responsibilityEven an active system does not release

the driver from personal responsibility for thedriving process, especially for lane tracking,adaptation of speed, distance and driving styleto the traffic conditions.Because of technical system limits, the systemcannot independently react appropriately in alltraffic situations.Monitor the driving process, the surroundingarea and what is occurring in traffic continu‐ously and attentively and actively intervene asrequired, e.g., by braking, steering or makingan evasive maneuver.◀

Unfavorable weather conditionsIn the event of unfavorable weather and

light conditions, for instance if there is rain,snowfall, slush, fog or glare, this may result inpoorer recognition of traffic situations as wellas short-term interruptions for vehicles that arealready detected. Drive attentively, and react tothe current traffic events. Intervene activelywhen necessary, e.g., by braking, steering ormaking an evasive maneuver, otherwise, thereis danger of an accident.◀

At a glance

Buttons on the steering wheel

Press the but‐ton

Function

Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐ing, refer to page 111

Store/maintain speed, refer topage 112

Resume speed, refer topage 112

Seite 110

CONTROLS Driving comfort

110 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 111: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Press the but‐ton

Function

Reduce distance, refer topage 112

Increase distance, refer topage 112

Maintain or save speed, refer topage 112Increase maintain or save speed,refer to page 112

Maintain or save speed, refer topage 112Reduce, maintain or store speed,refer to page 112

The arrangement of the buttons varies accord‐ing to the how the vehicle is equipped or coun‐try-specific variants.

Camera

The camera is located near the base of the mir‐ror.Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐terior rearview mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off and interrupting cruisecontrol

Switching onPress the button on the steeringwheel.

Display in the instrument cluster lightsup.

Display in the instrument cluster lightsup. The current speed is adopted as thedesired speed and displayed on the

symbol.

Cruise control can be used.

Switching offDeactivated or interrupted systemIf the system is deactivated or inter‐

rupted, actively intervene by braking, steeringand, if necessary, with evasive maneuvers; oth‐erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐curring.◀

Press the button on the steeringwheel.

▷ If active: press twice.▷ If interrupted: press once.The displays go out. The stored desired speedand distance are deleted.

InterruptingPress the button on the steeringwheel.

The system is automatically interrupted if:▷ The brakes are applied.▷ The clutch pedal is depressed for a few sec‐

onds or released while a gear is not en‐gaged.

▷ Selector lever position N is engaged.▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated

or DSC is deactivated.▷ DSC is actively controlling stability.▷ The detection range of the camera is dis‐

torted, for example, by soiling, heavy pre‐cipitation or glare from the sun.

▷ The vehicle in front decelerates below aspeed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

Seite 111

Driving comfort CONTROLS

111Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 112: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Maintaining/storing the speedPress the button.Or:

or Press button in the interrupted state.When the system is switched on, the currentspeed is maintained and stored as the desiredspeed.

The speed is displayed on the symbol.When cruise control is maintained orstored, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is

switched on, if necessary.

Changing, maintaining, and storing thespeed

or button: by pressing one of the but‐tons while the system is interrupted, the cur‐rent speed can be maintained and stored. DSCDynamic Stability Control is switched on, if nec‐essary.

Adapting the desired speedAdapt the desired speed to the road con‐

ditions and be ready to brake at all times; oth‐erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐curring.◀

Speed differencesLarge differences in speed relative to

other vehicles cannot be compensated by thesystem for example in the following situations:▷ When quickly approaching a slowly moving

vehicle.▷ When another vehicle suddenly swerves

into the wrong lane.◀ or button: press until the desired speed

is set.If active, the displayed speed is stored and thevehicle reaches the stored speed if the road isclear.▷ or button: each time it is pressed to

the point of resistance, the desired speed

increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/ km/

▷ or button: each time it is pressedpast the point of resistance, the desiredspeed increases or decreases by a maxi‐mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.

or button: hold down to repeat the cor‐responding action.

DistanceSelecting a distanceAdjust the distance according to the traf‐

fic and weather conditions; otherwise, there isthe danger of an accident occurring. Maintainthe prescribed safety distance.◀

Reduce distancePress the button repeatedly until thedesired distance is set.

The set distance increment is briefly dis‐played in the left part of the instrumentcluster.

Increase distancePress the button repeatedly until thedesired distance is set.

The set distance increment is briefly dis‐played in the left part of the instrumentcluster.

Calling up the desired speed anddistance

While drivingPress the button with the system inter‐rupted. The regulation of the desired

speed and distance is continued with thestored values. The selected distance is brieflydisplayed in the info display.

Seite 112

CONTROLS Driving comfort

112 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 113: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

In the following cases, the stored speed value isdeleted and cannot be called up again:▷ When the system is switched off.▷ When the ignition is switched off.

Changing between cruise control with/without distance control

Traffic driving aheadThe cruise control does not react to traffic

driving ahead of you, but instead maintains thestored speed. Take this factor into account –you yourself must react; otherwise, there is thedanger of an accident occurring.◀

To switch over to cruise control:Press and hold the button, or

Press and hold the button.

The indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster comes on and check-controlmessage is displayed as soon as the

switch is made to cruise control.

To switch back to the camera-based cruise con‐trol, press one of the buttons.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Desired speedIn addition to the indicator lamp, thedesired speed is displayed in the infodisplay.

▷ The indicator lights up green: the system isactive.

▷ The indicator lights up orange: the systemhas been interrupted.

▷ No display: system is switched off.

Brief status displaySelected desired speed.

If --- appears briefly on the display for CheckControl messages, it is possible that the systemrequirements for operation are currently notmet.

Distance to vehicle ahead of youSelected distance from the vehicle drivingahead is briefly displayed in the left hand por‐tion of the info display.Distance display

Distance 1

Distance 2

Distance 3

Distance 4This value is set after the system isswitched on.

Indicator/warning lampsPersonal responsibilityThe indicator and warning lamps do not

relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapthis or her desired driving speed and style to thetraffic conditions.◀

The vehicle symbol lights up orange:A vehicle has been detected ahead ofyou.

The vehicle symbol flashes orange:The conditions are not adequate for op‐erating the system.

The system was deactivated but applies thebrakes until you actively resume control bypressing on the brake pedal or acceleratorpedal.

Seite 113

Driving comfort CONTROLS

113Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 114: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

The vehicle symbol flashes red and anacoustic signal sounds:You are requested to intervene by brak‐

ing or making an evasive maneuver.

The system has been interrupted or dis‐tance control is deactivated becausethe accelerator pedal is being pressed;

a vehicle was not detected.

Distance control is deactivated becausethe accelerator pedal is being pressed;a vehicle was detected.

Changing between cruise control with/without distance controlDisplay in the instrument cluster:

Cruise Control without distance control.

Camera-based cruise control with dis‐tance control.

Displays in the Head-up DisplayThe information from Active Cruise Control canalso be displayed in the Head-up Display.Adjusting the Head-up Display, refer topage 83.

System limits

Speed rangeThe optimum area of use is on well constructedroads. The system is functional at speeds be‐ginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.The max. speed that can be set is85 mph/140 km/h.Comply with the legal speed limit in every sit‐uation when using the system.

Detection range

The detection capacity of the system and theautomatic braking capacity are limited.Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might notbe detected.

Limited detection capacityBecause of the limits to the detection ca‐

pacity of the camera, you should be alert at alltimes so that you can intervene actively, if nec‐essary; otherwise, there is the danger of an ac‐cident occurring.◀

DecelerationThe system does not decelerate for:▷ Pedestrians, cyclists or similar slow road

users.▷ Red traffic lights.▷ Cross traffic.▷ Oncoming traffic.▷ Unlit vehicles or vehicles with defective

lighting at night.

Seite 114

CONTROLS Driving comfort

114 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 115: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Swerving vehicles

A vehicle driving in front of you is not detecteduntil it is completely within the same lane asyour vehicle.

Swerving vehiclesIf a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly

swerves into your lane, the system may not beable to automatically restore the selected dis‐tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g.,when rapidly approaching a truck. When a ve‐hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected,the system requests that the driver interveneby braking and carrying out evasive maneu‐vers, if necessary. You must react yourself; oth‐erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐curring.◀

Cornering

If the desired speed is too high for a curve, thespeed is reduced slightly in the curve, althoughcurves cannot be anticipated in advance.Therefore, drive into a curve at an appropriatespeed.

In tight curves, situations may result due to therestricted detection range of the system inwhich a vehicle driving ahead of you may notbe detected at all, or not until after a considera‐ble delay.

When approaching a curve, the system may re‐act briefly to the vehicles in the next lane dueto the bend of the curve. Any deceleration ofthe vehicle by the system can be compensatedfor by briefly accelerating. After the acceleratorpedal is released, the system becomes activeagain and independently controls the speed.

MalfunctionA Check Control message is displayed if the sys‐tem fails or was automatically deactivated.The system may not be fully functional in thefollowing situations:▷ If an object was not correctly detected.▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐

fall.▷ In tight curves.▷ If the camera view field or the front wind‐

shield are dirty or covered.▷ When driving toward bright lights.▷ Up to 20 seconds after the start of the en‐

gine, via the Start/Stop knob.▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐

ately after vehicle shipment.

Seite 115

Driving comfort CONTROLS

115Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 116: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Cruise controlThe conceptThe system is functional at speeds beginning atapprox. 20 mph/30 km/h.It maintains the speed that was set using thecontrol elements on the steering wheel.The system brakes on downhill gradients if en‐gine braking action is insufficient.

Unfavorable conditionsDo not use the system if unfavorable con‐

ditions make it impossible to drive at a constantspeed, for instance:▷ On curvy roads.▷ In heavy traffic.▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or

on a loose road surface.Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicleand cause an accident.◀

General informationDepending on the set drive mode, refer topage 108, the characteristics of the cruise con‐trol can change in certain areas.

Controls

At a glance

Press the button Function

System on/off, interrupt

Store speed

Resume speed

Increasing, maintaining orstoring the speed

Reducing, maintaining or stor‐ing the speed

Switching onPress the button on the steeringwheel.

The indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.

The current speed is adopted as the de‐sired speed and is displayed with thesymbol in the instrument cluster.

Cruise control can be used.

Switching offDeactivated or interrupted systemIf the system is deactivated or inter‐

rupted, actively intervene by braking and, ifnecessary, with evasive maneuvers; otherwise,there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀

Press the button.

▷ If active: press twice.▷ If interrupted: press once.The displays go out. The stored desired speed isdeleted.

InterruptingWhen active, press the button.

The system is automatically interrupted if:▷ The brakes are applied.▷ The clutch pedal is depressed for a few sec‐

onds or released while a gear is not en‐gaged.

▷ The gear engaged is too high for the cur‐rent speed.

▷ Selector lever position N is engaged.▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated

or DSC is deactivated.▷ DSC is actively controlling stability.

Seite 116

CONTROLS Driving comfort

116 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 117: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Maintaining/storing the current speedPress the button.

Or or button: press while the system is in‐

terrupted.When the system is switched on, the currentspeed is maintained and stored as the desiredspeed.This is displayed in the instrument cluster.When cruise control is maintained or stored,DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, ifnecessary.

Changing/maintaining speed or button: can be pressed while the sys‐

tem is interrupted in order to maintain andstore the current speed.

Adapting the desired speedAdapt the desired speed to the road con‐

ditions and be ready to brake at all times; oth‐erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐curring.◀

or button: press repeatedly until the de‐sired speed is set.If active, the displayed speed is stored and thevehicle reaches the stored speed if the road isclear.▷ or button: each time it is pressed to

the point of resistance, the desired speedincreases or decreases by approx.1 mph/1 km/h.

▷ or button: each time it is pressedpast the point of resistance, the desiredspeed increases or decreases by a maxi‐mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.The maximum speed that can be set de‐pends on the vehicle.

▷ or button: pressing it to the resist‐ance point and holding it there acceleratesor decelerates the vehicle without requiring

pressure on the accelerator pedal. After thebutton is released, the vehicle maintains itsfinal speed. Pressing the switch beyond theresistance point causes the vehicle to accel‐erate more rapidly.

Resuming the desired speedPress the button.

The stored speed is reached and maintained.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Indicator lampDepending on how the vehicle is equip‐ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐

tem is switched on.

Desired speedThe desired speed is displayed togetherwith the symbol.▷ The indicator lights up green: the

system is active.▷ The indicator lights up orange: the system

has been interrupted.▷ No display: system is switched off.

Brief status displaySelected desired speed.

If --- appears briefly on the display for CheckControl messages, it is possible that the systemrequirements for operation are currently notmet.

Seite 117

Driving comfort CONTROLS

117Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 118: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

PDC Park Distance Con‐trolThe conceptPDC supports you when parking. Slowly ap‐proaching an object behind or, with the appro‐priate equipment, also in front of your vehicle issignaled by:▷ Signal tones.▷ Visual display.

General informationMeasurements are made by ultrasound sensorsin the bumpers.The range, depending on obstacles and envi‐ronmental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m.An acoustic warning is first given:▷ By the front middle sensors and the two

corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.

5 ft/1.50 m.

HintsCheck the traffic situation as wellPDC cannot serve as a substitute for the

driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa‐tion. Check the traffic situation around the ve‐hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐dent could result from road users or objectslocated outside of the PDC detection range.Loud noises from outside and inside the vehiclemay prevent you from hearing the PDC's signaltone.◀

Avoid driving quickly with PDCAvoid approaching an object quickly.

Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yetactive.For technical reasons, the system may other‐wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

PDC Park Distance Control

Switching on/off

Switching on automaticallyPDC switches on automatically in the followingsituations:▷ If selector lever position R is engaged when

the engine is running.▷ If, with the appropriate equipment, obsta‐

cles are detected behind or in front of thevehicle by PDC and the speed is slower thanapprox. 2 mph/3 km/h.

Automatic activation when obstacles are de‐tected can be switched off:

1. "Settings"2. "Parking"3. Select the setting.

The setting is stored for the remote controlcurrently in use.

Automatic deactivation during forwardtravelThe system switches off when a certain drivingdistance or speed is exceeded.Switch the system back on if necessary.

Seite 118

CONTROLS Driving comfort

118 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 119: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Switching on/off manuallyPress the button.

▷ On: the LED lights up.▷ Off: the LED goes out.

Display

Signal tonesWhen approaching an object, an intermittenttone is sounded that indicates the position ofthe object. For example, if an object is detectedto the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tonesounds from the left rear speaker.The shorter the distance to the object becomes,the shorter the intervals.If the distance to a detected object is less thanapprox. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone issounded.If objects are located both in front of and be‐hind the vehicle, an alternating continuous sig‐nal is sounded.The signal tone is switched off:▷ When the vehicle moves away from an ob‐

ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm.▷ When selector lever position P is engaged.

VolumeThe volume of the PDC signal can be adjusted,refer to user's manual for Navigation, Enter‐tainment and Communication.The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

Visual warningThe approach of the vehicle to an object can beshown on the Control Display. Objects that arefarther away are displayed on the Control Dis‐play before a signal tone sounds.A display appears as soon as Park DistanceControl (PDC) is activated.

The range of the sensors is represented in col‐ors: red, green and yellow.When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐played, the switch can be made to PDC:

"Rear view camera"

System limits

Limits of ultrasonic measurementThe detection of objects can reach the physicallimits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g., in thefollowing circumstances:▷ For small children and animals.▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.

coats.▷ If there is an external disturbance of the ul‐

trasound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loudmachines.

▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damagedor out of position.

▷ Under certain weather conditions, such ashigh relative humidity, rain, snowfall ex‐treme heat or strong wind.

▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches of othervehicles.

▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.▷ With moving objects.▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as

ledges or cargo.▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.▷ With objects with a fine surface structure,

such as fences.▷ For objects with porous surfaces.Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, canmove into the blind area of the sensors beforeor after a continuous tone sounds.

False warningsPDC may issue a warning under the followingconditions even though there is no obstaclewithin the detection range:

Seite 119

Driving comfort CONTROLS

119Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 120: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

▷ In heavy rain.▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered in

ice.▷ When sensors are covered in snow.▷ On rough road surfaces.▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps.▷ In large buildings with right angles and

smooth walls, e.g., in underground garages.▷ In heavy exhaust.▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,

sweeping machines, high pressure steamcleaners or neon lights.The malfunction is signaled by a continuoustone alternating between the front and rearspeakers. As soon as the malfunction dueto other ultrasound sources is no longerpresent, the system is again fully functional.

MalfunctionA Check Control message, refer to page 72, isdisplayed in the instrument cluster.

Red symbol is displayed, and the rangeof the sensors is darkly displayed on theControl Display.

PDC has failed. Have the system checked.To ensure full operability:▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.▷ Do not adhere any stickers to the sensors.▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not

spray the sensors for long periods andmaintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.

Rearview cameraThe conceptThe rearview camera provides assistance inparking and maneuvering backwards. The areabehind the vehicle is shown on the Control Dis‐play.

HintsCheck the traffic situation as wellCheck the traffic situation around the ve‐

hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐dent could result from road users or objects lo‐cated outside the picture area of the backupcamera.◀

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Rearview camera

Camera

The camera lens is located in the handle of thetailgate. The image quality may be impaired bydirt.Clean the lens, refer to page 210.

Seite 120

CONTROLS Driving comfort

120 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 121: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Switching on/off

Switching on automaticallyWith the engine running, engage selector leverposition R.The rearview camera image is displayed if thesystem was switched on via the onboard moni‐tor.

Automatic deactivation during forwardtravelThe system switches off when a certain drivingdistance or speed is exceeded.Switch the system back on if necessary.

Switching on/off manuallyPress the button.

▷ On: the LED lights up.▷ Off: the LED goes out.The PDC is shown on the Control Display.

Switch on the rearview camera via theonboard monitorWith PDC activated:

"Rear view camera"The rearview camera image is displayed.

Display on the Control Display

Functional requirement▷ The rearview camera is switched on.▷ The tailgate is fully closed.

Activating the assistance functionsMore than one assistance function can be ac‐tive at the same time.▷ Parking aid lines

"Parking aid lines"Pathway and turning circle lines are dis‐played.

▷ Obstacle marking "Obstacle marking"

Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.

Pathway lines

▷ Can be shown in the rearview camera im‐age.

▷ Help you to estimate the space requiredwhen parking and maneuvering on levelroads.

▷ Are dependent on the current steering an‐gle and are continuously adjusted to thesteering wheel movements.

Turning circle lines

▷ Can be shown in the rearview camera im‐age.

▷ Show the course of the smallest possibleturning circle on a level road.

▷ Only one turning circle line is displayed af‐ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer‐tain angle.

Seite 121

Driving comfort CONTROLS

121Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 122: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Obstacle marking

▷ Marks for detected obstacles can be shownin the rearview camera image.

Their colored steps match the markings of thePDC. This simplifies estimation of the distanceto the object shown.

Parking using pathway and turningcircle lines1. Position the vehicle so that the turning cir‐

cle lines lead to within the limits of theparking space.

2. Turn the steering wheel to the point wherethe pathway line covers the correspondingturning circle line.

Display settings

BrightnessWith the rearview camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol.2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached and press the controller.

ContrastWith the rearview camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol.2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached and press the controller.

System limits

Detection of objectsVery low obstacles or high, protruding objectssuch as ledges may not be recognized by thesystem.Assistance functions also take into account dataof the PDC.Follow instructions in the PDC chapter, refer topage 118.The objects displayed in the Control Display un‐der certain circumstances are closer than theyappear. Therefore, do not estimate the distancefrom the objects on the display.

Parking assistantThe concept

Seite 122

CONTROLS Driving comfort

122 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 123: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

This system assists the driver in parking parallelto the road.Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces onboth sides of the vehicle.The parking assistant calculates the best possi‐ble parking line and takes control of steeringduring the parking procedure.When parking, also take note of the visual andacoustic information issued by the PDC, theparking assistant and, where applicable, therearview camera, and react accordingly.A component of the parking assistant is thePDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 118.

HintsPersonal responsibilityEven an active system does not relieve

the driver from personal responsibility for thedriving process.Because of technical system limits, the systemcannot independently react appropriately in alltraffic situations.Continuously and attentively monitor the driv‐ing process, the area surrounding the vehicleand the traffic situation, and actively intervenewhen required, otherwise, there is a risk of anaccident.◀

Changes to the parking spaceChanges to the parking space after it was

measured are not taken into account by thesystem.Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci‐dent occurring.◀

Transporting loadsLoads that extend beyond the perimeter

of the vehicle are not taken into account by thesystem during the parking procedure.Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci‐dent occurring.◀

CurbsThe parking assistant may steer the vehi‐

cle over or onto curbs.Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐vene; otherwise, the wheels, tires, or the vehi‐cle may become damaged.◀

An engine that has been switched off by theAuto Start Stop function is restarted automati‐cally when the parking assistant is activated.

Requirements

For measuring parking spaces▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐

prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐

cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.

Suitable parking space▷ Gaps behind an object that have a min.

length of 5 ft/1.5 m.▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum

length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.▷ Min. length of gap between two objects:

your vehicle's length plus approx.3.3 ft/1.0 m.

▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

For parking procedure▷ Doors and tailgate closed.▷ Parking brake released.▷ When parking in parking spaces on the

driver's side, the corresponding turn signalmust be set.

Seite 123

Driving comfort CONTROLS

123Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 124: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Parking assistant

Ultrasound sensors

The ultrasound sensors for measuring parkingspaces are located on the wheel arches.To ensure full operability:▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not

spray the sensors for long periods andmaintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.

▷ Do not paste over sensors.

Switching on/off

Switching on with the buttonPress the button.The LED lights up.

The current status of the parking space searchis indicated on the Control Display.

Parking assistant is activated automatically.

Switching on with reverse gearShift into reverse.The current status of the parking space searchis indicated on the Control Display.To activate: "Parking Assistant"

Switching offThe system can be deactivated as follows:▷ Press the button.

▷ Switch off the ignition.

Indicator on the Control Display

System activated/deactivated

Symbol Meaning

Gray: the system is not available.White: the system is available but notactivated.

The system is activated.

System status

▷ Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side ofthe vehicle representation. Parking assis‐tant is activated and search for parkingspace active.

▷ Suitable parking spaces are displayed nextto the vehicle symbol at the edge of theroad as on the Control Display. When the

Seite 124

CONTROLS Driving comfort

124 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 125: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

parking assistant is active, suitable parkingspaces are highlighted.

▷ The parking procedure is ac‐tive. Steering control hasbeen seized.

▷ Parking space search is always activewhenever the vehicle is moving forwardsslow and straight, even if the system is de‐activated. When the system is deactivated,the displays on the Control Display areshown in gray.

Parking using the parking assistantCheck the traffic situation as wellLoud sounds outside and within the vehi‐

cle can drown out the signal tones of the park‐ing assistant and PDC.Check the traffic situation around the vehiclewith your own eyes; otherwise, there is thedanger of an accident.◀

1. Switch on the parking assistant and activateit if necessary.The status of the parking space search is in‐dicated on the display.

2. Follow the instructions on the display.To achieve the best possible parking posi‐tion, wait for the automatic steering wheelmovement after the gear change when thevehicle is stationary.The end of the parking procedure is indi‐cated on the display.

3. Adjust the parking position yourself if nec‐essary.

Interrupting manuallyThe parking assistant can be interrupted at anytime:▷ "Parking Assistant"▷ Press the button.

Interrupting automaticallyThe system is interrupted automatically in thefollowing situations:▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if

he takes over steering.▷ If a gear is selected that does not match the

instruction on the display.▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.

6 mph/10 km/h.▷ On snow-covered or slippery road surfaces

if necessary.▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts

or the time taken for parking is exceeded.▷ If the Park Distance Control PDC displays

clearances that are too small.▷ When switching into other functions of the

radio.A Check Control message is displayed.

ResumeAn interrupted parking procedure can be con‐tinued if necessary.To do this, follow the instructions on the dis‐play.

System limits

No parking assistanceThe parking assistant does not offer assistancein the following situations:▷ In tight curves.

Functional limitationsThe system may not be fully functional in thefollowing situations:▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel

roads.▷ On slippery ground.▷ When leaves or snow has collected in the

parking space.▷ With a mounted emergency wheel.

Seite 125

Driving comfort CONTROLS

125Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 126: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Limits of ultrasonic measurementThe detection of objects can reach the physicallimits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g., in thefollowing circumstances:▷ For small children and animals.▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.

coats.▷ If there is an external disturbance of the ul‐

trasound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loudmachines.

▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damagedor out of position.

▷ Under certain weather conditions, such ashigh relative humidity, rain, snowfall ex‐treme heat or strong wind.

▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches of othervehicles.

▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.▷ With moving objects.▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as

ledges or cargo.▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.▷ With objects with a fine surface structure,

such as fences.▷ For objects with porous surfaces.Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, canmove into the blind area of the sensors beforeor after a continuous tone sounds.The parking assistant may identify parkingspaces that are not suitable for parking.

MalfunctionA Check Control message is displayed.The parking assistant failed. Have the systemchecked.

Seite 126

CONTROLS Driving comfort

126 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 127: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Climate controlVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equipment

is also described that is not available in a vehi‐cle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

Air conditioner

1 Vent settings2 Air flow3 Temperature4 Seat heating, right  495 Cooling function

6 Recirculated-air mode7 Rear window defroster8 Windshield defroster9 Seat heating, left  49

Seite 127

Climate control CONTROLS

127Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 128: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Climate control functions in detail

Manual air distributionTurn the wheel to select the de‐sired program or the desired in‐termediate setting.

▷ Windows.▷ Upper body region.▷ Footwell.▷ Windows, upper body region, and foot‐

well.

Defrosting windows and removingcondensationDirect the air distribution toward windows, in‐crease the air flow and temperature, and, ifnecessary, use the cooling function.

Air flow, manualTurn the wheel to set the desiredair volume.The higher the rate, the more ef‐fective the heating or cooling willbe.

The air flow of the air conditioner may be re‐duced automatically to save battery power.

TemperatureTurn the wheel to set the desiredtemperature.

Cooling functionThe passenger compartment can only becooled with the engine running.

Press the button.

The air is cooled and dehumidified and, de‐pending on the temperature setting, warmedagain.

Depending on the weather, the windshield mayfog up briefly when the engine is started.When using the air conditioner, condensationwater, refer to page 150, develops that exitsunderneath the vehicle.

Recirculated-air modeYou can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐rarily suspending the supply of outside air. Thesystem then recirculates the air currently withinthe vehicle.

Press the button repeatedly to selectan operating mode:

▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply

of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐nently blocked.

Recirculated air mode switches off automati‐cally at low external temperatures after a cer‐tain amount of time in order to window fog‐ging.If the windows fog over, switch off recirculated-air mode and increase the air flow, if necessary.

Continuous recirculated-air modeThe recirculated-air mode should not be

used for an extended period of time, as the airquality inside the vehicle deteriorates stead‐ily.◀

Rear window defrosterPress the button.The rear window defroster switches off

automatically after a certain period of time.

When Green mode, refer to page 156, is acti‐vated, the heater output is reduced.

Seite 128

CONTROLS Climate control

128 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 129: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Windshield defrosterPress the button.The front window defroster switches

off automatically after a certain period of time.

Switching the system on/off

Switching offTurn wheel for air quantity to theleft until the control switches off.

Switching onSet any air volume.

MicrofilterIn external and recirculated air mode the mi‐crofilter filters dust and pollen out of the air.This filter should be replaced during scheduledmaintenance, refer to page 186, of your vehi‐cle.

Automatic climate control

1 Temperature, left2 Display3 Air flow, AUTO intensity4 AUTO program5 Air distribution, manual6 Display

7 Temperature, right8 Seat heating, right  499 Maximum cooling10 Cooling function11 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐

lated-air mode12 Rear window defroster

Seite 129

Climate control CONTROLS

129Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 130: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

13 Windshield defroster14 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐

sation

15 Seat heating, left  49

Climate control functions in detail

TemperatureTurn the wheel to set the desiredtemperature.

The automatic climate control reaches thistemperature as quickly as possible, if necessaryby increasing the cooling or heating output,and then keeps it constant.Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐perature settings. The automatic climate con‐trol will not have sufficient time to adjust theset temperature.

Air flow, manualTo be able to manually adjust the air flow,switch off the AUTO program first.

Turn the wheel to set the desiredair volume.

The selected air quantity is displayed on the au‐tomatic climate control.The air flow of the automatic climate controlmay be reduced automatically to save batterypower.

AUTO programPress the button.Air flow, air distribution, and tempera‐

ture are controlled automatically.

Depending on the selected temperature, AUTOintensity, and outside influences, the air is di‐

rected to the windshield, side windows, upperbody, and into the footwell.The cooling function, refer to page 131, andthe automatic recirculation control, refer topage 131, are automatically also switched onin the AUTO program.To switch off the program: press the buttonagain or manually adjust the air distribution.

Intensity of the AUTO programWith the AUTO program switched on, auto‐matic control of the air flow and air distributioncan be adjusted.

Turn the wheel to set the desiredintensity.

The selected intensity is displayed on the auto‐matic climate control.

Manual air distributionPress the button repeatedly to select aprogram:

▷ Upper body region.▷ Upper body region and footwell.▷ Footwell.▷ Windows and footwell.▷ Windows, upper body region, and footwell.▷ Windows and upper body region.▷ Windows.

Maximum coolingPress the button.

Seite 130

CONTROLS Climate control

130 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 131: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

The system is set to the lowest temperature,maximum air flow and recirculated-air mode.

Air flows out of the vents for the upper body re‐gion. The vents need to be open for this.The function is available above external tem‐perature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the en‐gine running.The air flow can be adjusted when the programis active.

Cooling functionThe passenger compartment can only becooled with the engine running.

Press the button.The air is cooled and dehumidified

and, depending on the temperature setting,warmed again.

Depending on the weather, the windshield mayfog up briefly when the engine is started.The cooling function is switched on automati‐cally with the AUTO program.When using the automatic climate control, con‐densation water, refer to page 150, developsthat exits underneath the vehicle.

Automatic recirculated-air control/recirculated-air modeYou can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐rarily suspending the supply of outside air. Thesystem then recirculates the air currently withinthe vehicle.

Press the button repeatedly to selectan operating mode:

▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air con‐

trol: a sensor detects pollutants in the out‐side air and controls the shutoff automati‐cally.

▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: thesupply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐manently blocked.

Recirculated air mode switches off automati‐cally at low external temperatures after a cer‐tain amount of time in order to window fog‐ging.If windows are fogged over, switch off the recir‐culating mode and press the AUTO button.Make sure that air can flow onto the wind‐shield.

Continuous recirculated-air modeThe recirculated-air mode should not be

used for an extended period of time, as the airquality inside the vehicle deteriorates stead‐ily.◀

Rear window defrosterPress the button.The rear window defroster switches off

automatically after a certain period of time.

When Green mode, refer to page 156, is acti‐vated, the heater output is reduced.

Windshield defrosterPress the button.The front window defroster switches

off automatically after a certain period of time.

Defrosting windows and removingcondensation

Press the button.Ice and condensation are quickly re‐

moved from the windshield and the front sidewindows.

The air flow can be adjusted when the programis active.If the windows fog over, also switch on thecooling function or press the AUTO button.

Seite 131

Climate control CONTROLS

131Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 132: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Switching the system on/off

Switching offTurn wheel for air quantity to theleft until the control switches off.

Switching onSet any air volume.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filterIn external and recirculated air mode the mi‐crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust,pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.This filter should be replaced during scheduledmaintenance, refer to page 186, of your vehi‐cle.

Ventilation

▷ Turn knob for continuous opening and clos‐ing of the vents.

▷ Swivel the vents to alter the direction of thevent flow, arrow.

Adjusting the ventilation▷ Ventilation for cooling:

Adjust the vent to direct the air in your di‐rection, such as if the vehicle interior is hotfrom the sun.

▷ Draft-free ventilation:

Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.

Parked-car ventilationThe conceptThe parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi‐cle interior and lowers its temperature, if nec‐essary.The system can be switched on and off at anyexternal temperature, either directly or by us‐ing two preset switch-on times. It remainsswitched on for 30 minutes.Open the vents to allow air to flow out.

Switching on/off directly1. "Settings"2. "Climate"3. "Activate comf. ventilation"

The symbol on the automatic climate con‐trol flashes if the system is switched on.

Preselecting the switch-on time1. "Settings"2. "Climate"3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"4. Set the desired time.

Activating the switch-on time1. "Settings"2. "Climate"3. "Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2"

The symbol on the automatic climate con‐trol lights up when the switch-on time is acti‐vated.

The symbol on the automatic climate con‐trol flashes when the system has been switchedon.The system will only be switched on within thenext 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐vated.

Seite 132

CONTROLS Climate control

132 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 133: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Interior equipmentVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equipmentis also described that is not available in a vehi‐cle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

Universal garage dooropenerThe conceptThe universal garage door opener can operateup to 3 functions of remote-controlled systemssuch as garage door drives or lighting systems.The universal garage door opener replaces upto 3 different hand-held transmitters. To oper‐ate the remote control, the buttons on the inte‐rior rearview mirror must be programmed withthe desired functions. The hand-held transmit‐ter for the particular system is required in orderto program the remote control.

During programmingDuring programming and before activat‐

ing a device using the integrated universal re‐mote control, ensure that there are no people,animals, or objects in the range of movementof the remote-controlled device; otherwise,there is a risk of injury or damage.Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-held transmitter.◀

Before selling the vehicle, delete the storedfunctions for the sake of security.

CompatibilityIf this symbol is printed on the packag‐ing or in the instructions of the systemto be controlled, the system is generally

compatible with the universal garage dooropener.If you have any questions, please contact:▷ Your service center.▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of JohnsonControls, Inc.

At a glance

1 LED2 Programmable keys3 Hand-held transmitters of the system

Programming

General information1. Switch on the ignition.2. Initial setup:

Press and hold the left and right button onthe interior rearview mirror simultaneouslyfor approximately 20 seconds until the LEDon the interior rearview mirror flashes. Thiserases all programming of the buttons onthe interior rearview mirror.

Seite 133

Interior equipment CONTROLS

133Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 134: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5to 8 cm away from the buttons on the inte‐rior rearview mirror. The required distancedepends on the manual transmitter.

4. Simultaneously press and hold the buttonof the desired function on the hand-heldtransmitter and the button to be program‐med on the interior rearview mirror. TheLED on the interior rearview mirror will be‐gin flashing slowly.

5. Release both buttons as soon as the LEDflashes more rapidly. When the LED is flash‐ing faster, this indicates that the button onthe interior rearview mirror has been pro‐grammed.If the LED does not flash faster after at least60 seconds, change the distance betweenthe interior rearview mirror and the hand-held transmitter and repeat the step. Sev‐eral more attempts at different distancesmay be necessary. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween attempts.Canada: if programming with the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, holddown the interior rearview mirror buttonand repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 seconds.

6. To program other functions on other but‐tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.

The systems can be controlled using the interiorrearview mirror buttons.

Special feature of the alternating-codewireless systemIf you are unable to operate the system afterrepeated programming, please check if the sys‐tem to be controlled features an alternating-code system.Read the system's operating manual, or pressthe programmed button on the interior rear‐view mirror longer. If the LED on the interiorrearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and thenstays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system

features an alternating-code system. Flashingand continuous illumination of the LED will re‐peat for approximately 20 seconds.For systems with an alternating-code system,the universal garage door opener and the sys‐tem also have to be synchronized.Please read the operating manual of the sys‐tem being set up for information on how tosynchronize the system.Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a secondperson.To synchronize:

1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐mote-controlled system.

2. Program the relevant button on the interiorrearview mirror as described.

3. Locate and press the synchronizing buttonon the system being programmed. Youhave approx. 30 seconds for the next step.

4. Hold down the programmed button on theinterior rearview mirror for approximately3 seconds and then release it. If necessary,repeat this work step up to three times inorder to finish synchronization. Once syn‐chronization is complete, the programmedfunction will be carried out.

Reprogramming individual buttons1. Switch on the ignition.2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror

button to be programmed.3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED

starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-heldtransmitter for the system to be controlledapprox. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from thebuttons on the interior rearview mirror. Therequired distance depends on the manualtransmitter.

Seite 134

CONTROLS Interior equipment

134 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 135: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

4. Likewise, press and hold the button of thedesired function on the hand-held trans‐mitter.

5. Release both buttons as soon as the interiorrearview mirror LED flashes more rapidly.When the LED is flashing faster, this indi‐cates that the button on the interior rear‐view mirror has been programmed. Thesystem can then be controlled by the but‐ton on the interior rearview mirror.If the LED does not flash faster after at least60 seconds, change the distance and re‐peat the step. Several more attempts at dif‐ferent distances may be necessary. Wait atleast 15 seconds between attempts.Canada: if programming with the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, holddown the interior rearview mirror buttonand repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 seconds.

ControlsBefore operationBefore operating a system using the

integrated universal remote control, ensurethat there are no people, animals, or objectswithin the range of movement of the remote-controlled system; otherwise, there is a risk ofinjury or damage.Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-held transmitter.◀

The system, such as the garage door, can beoperated using the button on the interior rear‐view mirror while the engine is running orwhen the ignition is started. To do this, holddown the button within receiving range of thesystem until the function is activated. The inte‐rior rearview mirror LED stays lit while the wire‐less signal is being transmitted.

Deleting stored functionsPress and hold the left and right button on theinterior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes

rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. Thefunctions cannot be deleted individually.

Digital compassAt a glance

1 Control button2 Mirror display

Mirror displayThe point of the compass is displayed in themirror when driving straight.

Operating conceptVarious functions can be called up by pressingthe control button with a pointed object, suchas the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object.The following setting options are displayed insuccession, depending on how long the controlbutton is pressed:▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering

setting.▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.

Setting the compass zonesSets the particular compass zones on the vehi‐cle so that the compass operates correctly; re‐fer to World map with compass zones.

Seite 135

Interior equipment CONTROLS

135Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 136: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

World map with magnetic zones

Procedure1. Press and hold the control button for ap‐

prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the setcompass zone appears in the mirror.

2. To change the zone setting, press the con‐trol button quickly and repeatedly until thenumber of the compass zone correspond‐ing to your location appears in the mirror.

The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐pass is ready for use again after approximately10 seconds.

Calibrating the digital compassThe digital compass must be calibrated in theevent of the following:▷ The wrong point of the compass is dis‐

played.▷ The point of the compass displayed does

not change despite changing the directionof travel.

▷ Not all points of the compass are displayed.

Procedure1. Make sure that there are no large metallic

objects or overhead power lines near thevehicle and that there is sufficient room todrive around in a circle.

2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.3. Press and hold the control button for ap‐

prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears onthe display. Next, drive in a complete circleat least once at a speed of no more than4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is successful,the "C" is replaced by the points of thecompass.

Left/right-hand steeringThe digital compass is already set for right orleft-hand steering at the factory.

Setting the languagePress and hold the control button for approx.12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control but‐ton again to switch between English "E" andGerman "O".

Seite 136

CONTROLS Interior equipment

136 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 137: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

The setting is stored automatically after ap‐proximately 10 seconds.

Connecting electrical de‐vicesHints

Do not connect charging devices to the12 volt socket in the vehicle

Do not connect battery chargers to the factory-installed 12 volt sockets in the vehicle as thismay damage the vehicle battery due to an in‐creased power consumption.◀

Replace the cover after useReinsert the lighter or socket cover after

use, otherwise objects may get into the lightersocket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀

Keep the airbag unfolding area clearMake sure that the devices and cable are

located outside of the unfolding area of the air‐bag; otherwise, its unfolding can be hinderedor objects can be hurled through the interiorwhen the airbag unfolds.◀

SocketsSockets can be used for the operation of elec‐trical devices with the engine running or withthe ignition switched on. The total load of allsockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts.Do not damage the socket by using unsuitableconnectors.

In the center console

Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

In the cargo area

The socket is located on the right side in thecargo area.

USB interfaceThe conceptConnection for USB devices with music files andfor importing data, such as for Personal Profilesettings.

Seite 137

Interior equipment CONTROLS

137Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 138: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

At a glance

The USB interface is located in the front of thecenter console.

HintsObserve the following when connecting:▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐

nector into the USB interface.▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or

lamps to the USB interface.▷ Do not connect any USB hard drives or USB

hubs.▷ Do not use the USB interface to recharge

external devices.

Ashtray/cigarettelighterAt a glance

The ashtray is located in one of the front cu‐pholders, the cigarette lighter above it in thecenter console.

AshtrayIn order to empty the ashtray, remove the ash‐tray from the cupholder.

LighterDanger of burnsOnly hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth‐

erwise, there is the danger of getting burned.Switch off the ignition and take the remotecontrol with you when leaving the vehicle sothat children cannot use the lighter and burnthemselves.◀

Replace the cover after useReinsert the lighter or socket cover after

use, otherwise objects may get into the lightersocket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀

Push in the lighter.The lighter can be removed assoon as it pops back out.

Cargo areaCargo coverWhen the tailgate is opened, the cargo cover israised.

Do not deposit heavy objectsDo not deposit heavy or hard objects on

the cargo cover. Otherwise, they may pose arisk to occupants, such as during braking andavoidance maneuvers.◀

To stow bulky objects, the cargo cover can beremoved:

Removing cargo cover1. Detach the left and right retaining straps at

the tailgate.

Seite 138

CONTROLS Interior equipment

138 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 139: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

2. Pull the cargo cover out of the brackets onthe left and right.

Installing cargo cover1. Slide the cover forward horizontally into the

two side brackets until it audibly latches.2. Attach the left and right retaining straps at

the tailgate.

Enlarging the cargo area

General informationThe cargo area can be enlarged by foldingdown the rear seat backrest.The rear seat backrest is divided into two partsat a ratio of 60 to 40. The backrest of the rightseat is connected to the backrest center sec‐tion.

HintsDanger of pinchingBefore folding down the rear seat back‐

rests, ensure that the area of movement of thebackrests is clear. Ensure that no one is locatedin or reaches into the area of movement of therear seat backrests. Otherwise, injury or dam‐age may result.◀

Push the headrests down, before thebackrests are folded down

Before folding down the rear seat backrests,make sure that the corresponding headrest ispushed all the way down; otherwise, damagemay result.◀

Folding down rear seat backrestThe rear seat backrests can be folded downfrom the front or from the cargo area.Before the backrest is folded down, hook thecorresponding safety belt into the safety belton the side.

Pull the release upward and fold the backresttoward the front.

Folding back the backrestEnsure that the lock is securely engagedWhen folding back the backrest, make

sure that it securely locks in place. When thishappens the red warning field on the seat dis‐appears. If the backrest is not properly en‐gaged, transported cargo could enter the pas‐senger compartment during braking or evasivemaneuvers and endanger the vehicle occu‐pants.◀

Fold up the backrest and press it into the latch.Make sure that the safety belt is not pinched.

Adjusting the backrest tiltTo transport bulky items, the cargo area can beexpanded by setting the backrests at a steeperangle.

1. Released the back rest, and tilt it forward.

Seite 139

Interior equipment CONTROLS

139Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 140: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

2. Fold the frame, arrow, up until it latches.

3. Fold back and latch the backrest.Do not install any child restraint systemsWhen the backrests are set at steeper po‐

sition, did not install any child restraint systemson the backrest; otherwise, their protective ef‐fect may be impaired.◀

Seite 140

CONTROLS Interior equipment

140 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 141: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Storage compartmentsVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equipmentis also described that is not available in a vehi‐cle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

At a glanceThe following storage compartments are avail‐able in the vehicle interior:▷ Storage compartment in front of the cu‐

pholders.▷ Storage tray in the center console.▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger

side.▷ Storage compartment above the glove

compartment.▷ Storage compartment in the center arm‐

rest.▷ Compartments in the doors.▷ Pockets on the backrests of the front seats.▷ Net underneath the center console in the

footwell of the front seat passenger.

Safety informationNo loose objects in the passenger com‐partment

Do not stow any objects in the passenger com‐partment without securing them; otherwise,they may present a danger to occupants for in‐stance during braking and avoidance maneu‐vers.◀

Do not place anti-slip mats on the dash‐board

Do not place anti-slip mats on the dashboard.The mat materials could damage the dash‐board.◀

Glove compartmentOpening

Pull the handle.The light in the glove compartment switcheson.

Close the glove compartment again im‐mediately

Close the glove compartment immediately afteruse while driving; otherwise, injury may occurduring accidents.◀

ClosingFold up the cover.

Seite 141

Storage compartments CONTROLS

141Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 142: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Storage compartmentabove the glove com‐partmentOpening

Press the lower edge of the cover.

Immediately close the storage compart‐ment

Close the storage compartment immediatelyafter use while driving; otherwise, injury mayoccur during accidents.◀

ClosingPush the cover back into the original position.

Compartments in thedoors

Do not stow any breakable objectsDo not store any breakable objects, e. g.

glass bottles, in the compartments, or there isan increased risk of injury in the event of an ac‐cident.◀

Center armrestThe center armrest contains a storage compart‐ment.

Opening

Press the button, arrow 1, and open center armrest upward, arrow 2.

CupholdersHints

Shatter-proof containers and no hotdrinks

Use light and shatter-proof containers and donot transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is theincreased danger of injury in an accident.◀

Unsuitable containersDo not forcefully push unsuitable contain‐

ers into the cupholders. This may result in dam‐age.◀

Front

In the center console.

Seite 142

CONTROLS Storage compartments

142 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 143: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Rear

In front of the back seats and in the side armr‐ests.

Clothes hooksThe clothes hooks are located above the sidewindows in the rear.

Do not obstruct viewWhen suspending clothing from the

hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driv‐er's vision.◀

No heavy objectsDo not hang heavy objects from the

hooks; otherwise, they may present a dangerto passengers during braking and evasive ma‐neuvers.◀

Storage space under thecargo floor panel

Located under the cargo floor panel on theright side is a trough for the onboard vehicletool kit.To remove the onboard vehicle tool kit, fold theright side of the cargo area floor upward.

Variable cargo areafloorWith the variable cargo area floor, the cargoarea can be configured corresponding to trans‐port requirements. To do this, remove thecargo area floor, and insert it in the desired po‐sition.Follow the instructions for securing cargo, referto page 151.

Lower position

▷ Larger objects can be transported.▷ Space for smaller objects remains between

the fixed and variable cargo area floor.

Seite 143

Storage compartments CONTROLS

143Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 144: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Folded up positionThe variable cargo area may not be usedas a partition net to separate the cargo

area and the passenger compartment.▷ Only use the variable cargo floor in the

folded-up position when the backrests arefolded up and locked.

▷ Always secure cargo against shifting, usingstraps, belts and lashing eyes, for example.

If you do not observe this precaution, you canendanger vehicle occupants and damage thecargo floor during braking.◀

Fold up the variable loading floor in the lowerposition, and push it behind the locks on theleft and right, arrow.▷ The maximum cargo area height is ach‐

ieved.▷ The cargo net can be loaded with light‐

weight and flat objects.

Upper position

▷ With the backrests folded down, a long, flatloading surface is produced.

Maximum load in this position:330 lbs/150 kg.

▷ Space for objects remains between thefixed and variable cargo area floor.

Seite 144

CONTROLS Storage compartments

144 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 145: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Seite 145

Storage compartments CONTROLS

145Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 146: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

DRIVE ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 147: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 148: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Things to remember when drivingVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equipmentis also described that is not available in a vehi‐cle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

Breaking-in periodGeneral informationMoving parts need to be broken in to adjust toeach other.The following instructions will help achieve along vehicle life and good economy.

Engine and axle driveAlways obey the official speed limit.

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 kmDo not exceed the maximum engine and roadspeed:▷ For gasoline engine, 4,500 rpm and

100 mph/160 km/h.▷ For diesel engine, 3,500 rpm and

93 mph/150 km/h.Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐stances.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 kmThe engine and vehicle speed can gradually beincreased.

TiresDue to technical factors associated with theirmanufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac‐

tion potential until after an initial breaking-inperiod.Drive conservatively for the first200 miles/300 km.

Brake systemBrakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimizedcontact and wear patterns between brake discsand brake pads. Drive moderately during thisbreak-in period.

ClutchThe function of the clutch reaches its optimallevel only after a distance driven of approx.300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,engage the clutch gently.

Following part replacementThe same breaking in procedures should be ob‐served if any of the components mentionedabove have to be renewed in the course of thevehicle's operating life.

General driving notesClosing the tailgate

Drive with the tailgate closedOnly drive with the tailgate closed; other‐

wise, in the event of an accident or braking andevasive maneuvers, passengers and other roadusers may be injured, and the vehicle may bedamaged. In addition, exhaust fumes may en‐ter the passenger compartment.◀

If driving with the tailgate open cannot beavoided:▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.▷ Greatly increase the blower speed.

Seite 148

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

148 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 149: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

▷ Drive moderately.

Hot exhaust systemHot exhaust systemHigh temperatures are generated in the

exhaust system.Do not remove the heat shields installed andnever apply undercoating to them. Make surethat flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves,grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hotexhaust system during driving, while in idle po‐sition mode, or when parked. Such contactcould lead to a fire, and with it the risk of seri‐ous personal injury as well as property damage.Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise,there is the danger of getting burned.◀

Diesel particulate filterThe diesel particulate filter collects soot parti‐cles and burns them periodically at high tem‐peratures.During the cleaning time of several minutes,the following may occur:▷ Temporarily, the engine may run less

smoothly.▷ Noises and a slight amount of smoke com‐

ing from the exhaust until shortly after theengine is shut down.

▷ A somewhat higher engine speed is neces‐sary to achieve the accustomed perform‐ance.

Mobile communication devices in thevehicle

Mobile communication devices in the ve‐hicle

It is advised that you do not use mobile com‐munication devices, e.g., mobile phones, insidethe vehicle without connecting them directly tothe external antenna. Otherwise, the vehicleelectronics and mobile communication devicescan interfere with each other. In addition, thereis no assurance that the radiation generated

during transmission will be discharged from thevehicle interior.◀

HydroplaningOn wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water canform between the tires and road surface.This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐ing. It is characterized by a partial or completeloss of contact between the tires and the roadsurface, ultimately undermining your ability tosteer and brake the vehicle.

HydroplaningWhen driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐

duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀

Driving through waterDrive through calm water only if it is not deeperthan 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this height, nofaster than walking speed, up to6 mph/10 km/h.

Adhere to water depth and speed limita‐tions

Do not exceed this water depth and walkingspeed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, theelectrical systems and the transmission may bedamaged.◀

Braking safelyYour vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standardfeature.Applying the brakes fully is the most effectiveway of braking in situations when this is neces‐sary.The vehicle maintains steering responsiveness.You can still avoid any obstacles with a mini‐mum of steering effort.Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds fromthe hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in itsactive mode.

Seite 149

Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS

149Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 150: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Objects in the area around the pedalsNo objects in the area around the pedalsKeep floor mats, carpets, and any other

objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;otherwise, the function of the pedals could beimpeded while driving and create the risk of anaccident.Do not place additional floor mats over existingmats or other objects.Only use floor mats that have been approvedfor the vehicle and can be properly fixed inplace.Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastenedagain after they were removed for cleaning, forexample.◀

Driving in wet conditionsWhen roads are wet or there is heavy rain,briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedalevery few miles.Ensure that this action does not endanger otherroad users.The heat generated in this process helps drythe brake discs and pads.In this way braking efficiency will be availablewhen you need it.

HillsDrive long or steep downhill gradients in thegear in which the least braking is required. Oth‐erwise, the brake system may overheat, result‐ing in a reduction in the brake system effi‐ciency.You can increase the engine's braking effect byshifting down, going all the way to first gear, ifnecessary.

Avoid load on the brakesAvoid placing excessive load on the brake

system. Light but consistent brake pressure canlead to high temperatures, brake wear andpossibly even brake failure.◀

Do not drive in neutralDo not drive in neutral or with the engine

stopped, as doing so disables engine braking.In addition, steering and brake assist are un‐available with the engine stopped.◀

Brake disc corrosionCorrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐tion on the brake pads are furthered by:▷ Low mileage.▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not

used at all.▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressurethat must be exerted by the pads during brakeapplications to clean the discs is not reached.Should corrosion form on the brake discs, thebrakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐fect that generally cannot be corrected.

Condensation under the parked vehicleWhen using the automatic climate control, con‐densation water develops that exits under‐neath the vehicle.Traces of water under the vehicle like this arenormal.

Ground clearanceLimited ground clearanceObserve the limited ground clearance of

the vehicle, e. g. while entering undergroundparking garages or when driving over obsta‐cles. Otherwise, damages to the vehicle mayresult.◀

Seite 150

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

150 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 151: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

LoadingVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equipmentis also described that is not available in a vehi‐cle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

HintsOverloading the vehicleTo avoid exceeding the approved carry‐

ing capacity of the tires, never overload the ve‐hicle. Overloading can lead to overheating andincreases the rate at which damage developsinside the tires. This could result in a suddenloss of tire inflation pressure.◀

No fluids in the trunkMake sure that fluids do not leak into the

trunk; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐aged.◀

Heavy and hard objectsDo not stow any heavy and hard objects

in the passenger compartment without secur‐ing them; otherwise, they may present a dan‐ger to occupants, e.g., during braking and eva‐sive maneuvers.◀

Determining the loadlimit

1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐hicle’s placard:▷ The combined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX kg orYYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the ve‐hicle and unstable driving situationsmay result.

2. Determine the combined weight of thedriver and passengers that will be riding inyour vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kilograms or YYYpounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load ca‐pacity.For example, if the YYY amount equals1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs pas‐sengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacityis 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs =400 lbs.

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

Seite 151

Loading DRIVING TIPS

151Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 152: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Load

The maximum load is the sum of the weight ofthe occupants and the cargo.The greater the weight of the occupants, theless cargo that can be transported.

Stowing cargo▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the

cargo.▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐

ble, directly behind and at the bottom ofthe rear passenger seat backrests.

▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is notoccupied, secure each of the outer safetybelts in the opposite buckle.

▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backreststo stow cargo.

▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge ofthe backrests.

Securing cargoLashing eyes in the cargo area

Without storage compartment package: to se‐cure the cargo there are two lashing eyes, ar‐row 1, in the cargo area.With storage compartment package: to securethe cargo there are six lashing eyes, arrows 1and 2, in the cargo area.

Securing cargo▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐

taining straps or with draw straps.▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with

cargo straps.Attach the cargo straps, retaining straps ordraw straps to the lashing eyes in the cargoarea.

Securing cargoStow and secure the cargo as described

above; otherwise it may present a danger tothe occupants, e.g., during braking and avoid‐ance maneuvers.◀

Roof-mounted luggagerackNoteInstallation only possible with roof rack.Roof racks are available as special accessories.

Seite 152

DRIVING TIPS Loading

152 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 153: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

SecuringFollow the installation instructions of the roofrack.

LoadingBe sure that adequate clearance is maintainedfor tilting and opening the glass sunroof.Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center ofgravity when loaded, they have a major effecton vehicle handling and steering response.Therefore, note the following when loading anddriving:▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle

loads and the approved gross vehicleweight.

▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.▷ The roof load should not be too large in

area.▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the

bottom.▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie with

ratchet straps.▷ Do not let objects project into the opening

path of the tailgate.▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐

ation and braking maneuvers. Take cornersgently.

Rear luggage rackGeneral informationInstallation only possible with rear luggage rackpreparation.Rear racks are available as special accessories.

NoteFollow the installation instructions of the rearluggage rack.Drive cautiously and avoid sudden accelerationand braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.

SecuringCOOPER/COOPER D

COOPER S

The anchorage points, arrow 1, and the socket,arrow 2, are located below the covers in thebumper.Remove the covers before installing the rearluggage rack.

Power consumptionThe consumption of the rear luggage racklamps must not exceed the following values:▷ Turn signals: 42 watts per side.▷ Tail lamps: 50 watts per side.▷ Brake lamps: 84 watts in total.▷ Rear fog lamps: 42 watts in total.▷ Backup lamp: 42 watts in total.

Seite 153

Loading DRIVING TIPS

153Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 154: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Function of tail lampsBefore starting to drive, check that the

tail lamps of the rear luggage rack are function‐ing properly; otherwise, there is a risk of en‐dangering other road users.◀

Seite 154

DRIVING TIPS Loading

154 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 155: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Saving fuelVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equipmentis also described that is not available in a vehi‐cle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

General informationFuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ferent factors.The implementation of certain measures, driv‐ing style and regular maintenance can have aninfluence on fuel consumption and on the envi‐ronmental impact.

Remove unnecessarycargoAdditional weight increases fuel consumption.

Remove attached partsfollowing useRemove roof or rear luggage racks which areno longer required following use.Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.

Close the windows andglass sunroofDriving with the glass sunroof and windowsopen results in increased air resistance andraises fuel consumption.

TiresGeneral informationTires can affect fuel consumption values in vari‐ous ways, for instance fuel consumption can beinfluenced by the size of the tires.

Check the tire inflation pressureregularlyCheck and, if necessary, correct the tire infla‐tion pressure at least twice a month and beforestarting on a long trip.Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐sistance and thus raises fuel consumption andtire wear.

Drive away without de‐layDo not wait for the engine to warm-up whilethe vehicle remains stationary. Start drivingright away, but at moderate engine speeds.This is the fastest way for the cold engine toreach its operating temperature.

Look well ahead whendrivingAvoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐cle driving ahead of you.Driving smoothly and looking ahead reducesfuel consumption.

Seite 155

Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS

155Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 156: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Avoid high engine speedsUse 1st gear to get the vehicle in motion. Be‐ginning with 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. Whenaccelerating, shift up before reaching high en‐gine speeds.When you reach the desired speed, shift intothe highest applicable gear and drive with theengine speed as low as possible and at a con‐stant speed.As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowersfuel consumption and reduces wear.The gear shift indicator, refer to page 76, ofyour vehicle indicates the most fuel efficientgear.

Use coasting conditionsWhen approaching a red light, take your footoff the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to ahalt.On a downhill gradient, take your foot off theaccelerator and let the vehicle roll.The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.

Switch off the engineduring longer stopsSwitch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in trafficcongestion.

Auto Start/Stop functionThe Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle au‐tomatically switches off the engine during astop.If the engine is switched off and then restartedrather than leaving the engine running con‐stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are re‐duced. Savings can begin within a few secondsof switching off the engine.

In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐mined by other factors, such as driving style,road conditions, maintenance or environmentalfactors.

Switch off any functionsthat are not currentlyneededFunctions such as seat heating and the rearwindow defroster require a lot of energy andconsume additional fuel, especially in city andstop-and-go traffic.Therefore, switch off these functions if they arenot actually needed.

Have maintenance car‐ried outHave vehicles maintained regularly to achieveoptimal vehicle economy and operating life.Have the maintenance carried out by yourservice center.Please also note the MINI Maintenance System,refer to page 186.

GREEN modeThe conceptThe GREEN mode supports a driving style thatsaves on fuel consumption. For this purpose,the engine control and comfort functions, e. g.the climate control output, are adjusted.In cars with automatic transmission:The Coasting driving condition is enabled undercertain conditions.Under certain conditions the engine is auto‐matically decoupled from the transmission inselector lever position D. The vehicle continuestraveling with the engine idling to reduce fuel

Seite 156

DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel

156 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 157: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

consumption. Selector lever position D remainsengaged. An indicator provides informationabout the distance traveled in Coasting mode.In addition, context-sensitive instructions canbe displayed that assist in driving in a mannerthat optimizes fuel consumption.The extension of the range that is achieved as aresult can be displayed in the instrument clus‐ter.

At a glanceThe system includes the following MINIMALISMfunctions and displays:▷ GREEN bonus range, refer to page 158▷ GREEN tips driving instruction, refer to

page 158▷ GREEN climate control, refer to page 157▷ MINIMALISM analyzer, refer to page 160▷ Coasting driving condition, refer to

page 159

Activating GREEN modeTurn Driving Dynamics Control tothe right until GREEN mode isdisplayed in the instrument clus‐ter.

Configuring GREEN mode

Via the Driving Dynamics Control1. Activating GREEN mode.2. "Configure GREEN"3. Configure the program.

Via onboard monitor:1. "Settings"2. "GREEN Mode"Or

1. "Settings"2. "Driving mode"

3. "Configure GREEN"Configure the program.

GREEN tip▷ "Tip at:":

Set the GREEN mode speed at which aGREEN mode tip is to be displayed.

▷ "GREEN speed warning":A reminder is displayed if the set GREENmode speed is exceeded.

CoastingFuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengag‐ing the engine and Coasting, refer to page 159,with the engine idling.This function is only available in GREEN mode.

GREEN climate control"GREEN climate control"The climate control is adjusted to be fuel-effi‐cient.By making a slight change to the set tempera‐ture, or adjusting the rate of heating or coolingof the passenger compartment fuel consump‐tion can be economized.The outputs of the seat heater and the exteriormirror heating are also reduced.The exterior mirror heating is made availablewhen outside temperatures are very cold.

GREEN potentialThe percentage of potential savings that can beachieved with the current configuration is dis‐played.

Seite 157

Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS

157Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 158: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Display in the instrument cluster

GREEN bonus rangeAn extension of the range can beachieved by an adjusted drivingstyle.This may be displayed as the bo‐nus range in the instrument clus‐

ter.The bonus range is shown in the range display.The bonus range is automatically reset everytime the vehicle is refueled.

▷ Green display: efficient driving style.▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by

backing off the accelerator pedal.

Driving styleIn the instrument cluster, a markin the bar display indicates thecurrent efficiency of the drivingstyle.Mark in the left area, arrow 1:

display for energy recovered by coasting orwhen braking.Mark in the right area, arrow 2: display whenaccelerating.The efficiency of the driving style is shown bythe color of the bar:▷ Green display: efficient driving style as long

as the mark moves within the green range.▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by

backing off the accelerator pedal.The display switches to green as soon as allconditions for fuel-economy-optimized drivingare met.

GREEN tip driving instruction

The instruction indicates that the driving stylecan be adjusted to be more fuel efficient bybacking off the accelerator for instance.

NoteThe driving style display and GREEN mode tipsin the instrument cluster appear when theGREEN mode display is activated.Activating driving style and GREEN mode tips:

1. "Settings"2. "Instr. cluster display"3. "GREEN Info"

GREEN tip symbolsAn additional symbol and a text instruction aredisplayed.Symbol Measure

For efficient driving style, back off theaccelerator or delay accelerating toallow time to assess road conditions.

Reduce speed to the selected GREENspeed.

Automatic transmission: switch fromS/M to D or avoid manual shift inter‐ventions.

Seite 158

DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel

158 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 159: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Symbol Measure

Manual shift transmission: followshifting instructions.

Manual shift transmission: engageneutral for engine stop.

Indications on the Control Display

MINIMALISMInformation on fuel consumption and technol‐ogy can be displayed during driving.

1. "Vehicle Info"2. "MINIMALISM"

Displaying MINIMALISM infoThe current efficiency can be displayed.

"MINIMALISM info"The following systems are displayed:▷ Automatic engine Start/Stop function.▷ Energy recovery.▷ Climate control output.▷ Coasting.

Displaying GREEN mode tips "GREEN Tips"

Driving instruction and an additional symbolare displayed.The setting is stored for the profile currently inuse.

Coasting

The conceptThe system helps to conserve fuel.To do this, under certain conditions the engineis automatically decoupled from the transmis‐sion when selector lever position D is engaged.The vehicle continues traveling with the engine

idling to reduce fuel consumption. Selectorlever position D remains engaged.This driving condition is referred to as coasting.As soon as the brake or accelerator pedal is de‐pressed, the engine is automatically coupled tothe transmission again.

HintsCoasting is a component of the GREEN mode,refer to page 156, driving mode.Coasting is automatically activated whenGREEN mode is called via the Driving DynamicsControl, refer to page 108.The function is available in a certain speedrange.A forward-looking driving style helps the driverto use the function as often as possible andsupports the fuel-conserving effect of coasting.

Safety modeThe function is not available if one of the fol‐lowing conditions is satisfied.▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on

steep uphill or downhill grades.▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low

or vehicle electrical system drawing exces‐sive current.

▷ Cruise control activated.

Functional requirementsIn GREEN mode, this function is available in aspeed range from approximately 30 mph, ap‐prox. 50 km/h to 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h,if the following conditions are satisfied:▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not

operated.▷ The selector lever is in transmission position

D.▷ Engine and transmission are at operating

temperature.

Seite 159

Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS

159Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 160: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Display

Display in the instrument clusterThe mark in the bar display be‐low the tachometer is high‐lighted green and appears at thezero point. The tachometer ap‐proximately indicates idle speed.

Indications on the Control DisplayThe Coasting driving condition is displayed inMINIMALISM Info while this driving mode is ac‐tive.The distance traveled in the Coasting drivingcondition is indicated by a counter.

Color code green, arrow 1: distance traveled inthe Coasting driving condition. Symbol, ar‐row 2: coasting driving condition.

Displaying MINIMALISM info1. "Vehicle Info"2. "MINIMALISM"3. "MINIMALISM info"

Deactivating the system manuallyThe function can be deactivated in the Config‐ure GREEN mode, refer to page 157, menu,e.g., to use the braking effect of the enginewhen traveling downhill.The setting is saved for the profile currently be‐ing used.

MINIMALISM driving style analysis

The conceptThe system helps in this situation to develop anespecially efficient driving style and to conservefuel.For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed.The assessment is done in various categoriesand is displayed on the Control Display.Using this indication, the individual driving stylecan be oriented toward conserving fuel.The last fifteen minutes of a trip are evaluated.The range of the vehicle can be extended by anefficient driving style. This gain in range is dis‐played as a bonus range in the instrument clus‐ter and on the Control Display.

Functional requirementThe function is only available in GREEN mode.

Calling up MINIMALISM Analyser

Via the Driving Dynamics Control1. Activate GREEN mode.2. "MINIMALISM"3. Select the symbol.

Display

Display on the Control Display

The display of the MINIMALISM Analyser con‐sists of a fish, which is riding along in a glass ofwater on the roof of the MINI and a table ofvalues that rates the driving style in various cat‐

Seite 160

DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel

160 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 161: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

egories. The bonus range achieved by drivingstyle that minimizes fuel consumption is dis‐played below the table of values.The fish and the movements of the water in theglass symbolize the efficiency of the drivingstyle. The more efficient the driving style, theless the water sloshes around in the glass andthe better is the fish's mood, refer to arrow 1.The table of values includes asterisks, refer toarrow 2. The more efficient the driving style,the more stars are included in the table and thefaster the bonus range increases, refer to ar‐row 3.If by contrast the driving style is inefficient, thewater oscillates, the mood of the fish is sulliedand a reduced number of asterisks is displayed.To assist with an efficient driving style, GREENtips are displayed during the drive.Tips about the energy saving driving style, Con‐serving fuel, refer to page 155.

Seite 161

Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS

161Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 162: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

MOVE ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 163: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 164: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

RefuelingVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equipmentis also described that is not available in a vehi‐cle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

General informationRefuel promptlyRefuel no later than at a range of

30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine isnot ensured and damage may occur.◀

Diesel enginesThe filler neck is designed for refueling at dieselfuel pumps.

Fuel capOpening1. Grasp the fuel filler flap at the rear edge

and open it.

2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attachedto the fuel filler flap.

Closing1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you

clearly hear a click.2. Close the fuel filler flap.

Do not pinch the retaining strapDo not pinch the retaining strap attached

to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closedproperly and fuel vapors can escape.◀

Manually unlocking fuel filler flapIn the event of an electrical malfunction, for ex‐ample.

Seite 164

MOBILITY Refueling

164 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 165: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Remove the cover.Pull the green knob with the fuel pump symbol.This releases the fuel filler flap.

Observe the followingwhen refuelingThe fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicksoff the first time.

Do not overfill the fuel tankDo not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise

fuel may escape, causing harm to the environ‐ment and damaging the vehicle.◀

Handling fuelsObey safety regulations posted at the gas

station.◀

Seite 165

Refueling MOBILITY

165Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 166: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

FuelVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equipmentis also described that is not available in a vehi‐cle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

Fuel recommendationNote

General fuel qualityEven fuels that conform to the specifica‐

tions can be of low quality. This may cause en‐gine problems, for instance poor engine start‐ing behavior, poor handling and/orperformance. Switch gas stations or use abrand name fuel with a higher octane rating.◀

GasolineFor the best fuel economy, the gasoline shouldbe sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐taining metal must not be used.

Refuel only with unleaded gasoline with‐out metallic additives.

Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gaso‐line with metallic additives, e. g. manganese oriron, or permanent damage to the catalyticconverter and other components.◀

Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refuel‐ing.Ethanol should satisfy the following qualitystandards:US: ASTM 4806–xx

CAN: CGSB-3.511–xxxx: comply with the current standard in eachcase.

Do not use a fuel with a higher percent‐age of ethanol

Do not use a fuel with a higher ethanol per‐centage than recommended or one with othertypes of alcohol, i.e. no Flex Fuel, otherwise thiscould damage the engine and fuel supply sys‐tem.◀

Recommended fuel gradeMINI recommends AKI 91.

Minimum fuel gradeMINI recommends AKI 89.

Minimum fuel gradeDo not use any gasoline below the mini‐

mum fuel grade as this may impair engine per‐formance.◀

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐ing, the engine may produce knocking soundswhen starting at high outside temperatures.This has no effect on the engine life.

Fuel qualityThe use of poor-quality fuels may result in

harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition‐ally, problems relating to drivability, startingand stalling, especially under certain environ‐mental conditions such as high ambient tem‐perature and high altitude, may occur.If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐ommend switching to a high quality gasolinebrand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐gine deposits, it is highly recommended to pur‐chase gasoline from BP or Top Tier retailers.

Seite 166

MOBILITY Fuel

166 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 167: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Failure to comply with these recommendationsmay result in the need for unscheduled mainte‐nance.◀

Seite 167

Fuel MOBILITY

167Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 168: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Wheels and tiresVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equipmentis also described that is not available in a vehi‐cle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

Tire inflation pressureSafety informationThe tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐sure influence the following:▷ The service life of the tires.▷ Road safety.▷ Driving comfort.

Checking the pressureTires have a natural, consistent loss of pressure.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularlyRegularly check the tire inflation pressure,

and correct it as needed: at least twice a monthand before a long trip. If you fail to observe thisprecaution, you may be driving on tires with in‐correct tire pressures, a condition that may notonly compromise your vehicle's driving stabil‐ity, but also lead to tire damage and the risk ofan accident.◀

Tires heat up during driving, and the tire infla‐tion pressure increases along with the temper‐ature of the tire. The tire inflation pressurespecifications relate to cold tires or tires withthe ambient temperature.Only check the tire inflation pressure when thetires are cold. This means after driving no morethan 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle hasbeen parked for at least 2 hours.

The displays of inflation devices may under-read by up to 0.1bar, 2psi.For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tireinflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire Moni‐tor.For Tire Pressure Monitor: after correcting thetire inflation pressure, reset the Tire PressureMonitor.▷ Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.▷ Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.

Checking the inflation pressure of thecompact wheel

Located behind the bumper on the undersideof the vehicle is an opening for checking thetire inflation pressure.

Pressure specificationsThe tire inflation pressure table, refer topage 169, contains all pressure specificationsfor the specified tire sizes at the ambient tem‐perature. Pressure specifications apply to ap‐proved tire sizes and recommended tirebrands. This information can be obtained fromyour service center.To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,please note the following:▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.

Seite 168

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

168 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 169: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/160 km/hFor speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and foroptimum driving comfort, note the pressurevalues in the tire inflation pressure table, referto page 169, and adjust as necessary.

These pressure values can also be found on thetire inflation pressure label on the driver's doorpillar.

Maximum permissible speedDo not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; oth‐

erwise, tire damage and accidents may result.◀

Tire inflation pressure values up to100 mph/160 km/h

COOPER

Tire size Pressure specifications inbar/PSI

Specifications inbar/PSI with coldtires

175/65 R 15 84 HStd175/65 R 15 84 H M+S A/S Std195/55 R 16 87 V M+S A/S RSC205/45 R 17 88 V M+S XL A/S RSC195/55 R 16 87 WRSC205/45 R 17 88 W XLRSC205/40 R 18 86 W XLRSC175/65 R 15 84 H M+S Std175/60 R 16 86 H M+S XL RSC195/55 R 16 87 H M+S RSC205/45 R 17 88 V M+S XL RSC

2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35

Compact wheelT 115/70 R 15 90 M

Speed up to a max. of50 mph / 80 km/h4.2 / 60

Seite 169

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

169Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 170: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

COOPER S

Tire size Pressure specifications inbar/PSI

Specifications inbar/PSI with coldtires

195/55 R 16 87 WRSC195/55 R 16 87 V M+S A/S RSC195/55 R 16 87 H M+S RSC

2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35

205/45 R 17 88 V M+S XL A/S RSC205/45 R 17 88 W XLRSC205/40 R 18 86 W XLRSC175/60 R 16 86 H M+S XL RSC205/45 R 17 88 V M+S XL RSC

2.6 / 38 2.4 / 35

Tire inflation pressures at max. speedsabove 100 mph/160 km/h

Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/hIn order to drive at maximum speeds in

excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures forspeeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from therelevant table on the following pages. Other‐wise tire damage and accidents could occur.◀

Tire inflation pressure values over100 mph/160 km/h

COOPER

Tire size Pressure specifications inbar/PSI

Specifications inbar/PSI with coldtires

175/65 R 15 84 HStd175/65 R 15 84 H M+S A/S Std195/55 R 16 87 V M+S A/S RSC205/45 R 17 88 V M+S XL A/S RSC195/55 R 16 87 WRSC205/45 R 17 88 W XLRSC205/40 R 18 86 W XLRSC175/65 R 15 84 H M+S Std175/60 R 16 86 H M+S XL RSC195/55 R 16 87 H M+S RSC205/45 R 17 88 V M+S XL RSC

2.8 / 41 2.6 / 38

Compact wheelT 115/70 R 15 90 M

Speed up to a max. of50 mph / 80 km/h4.2 / 60

Seite 170

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

170 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 171: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

COOPER S

Tire size Pressure specifications inbar/PSI

Specifications inbar/PSI with coldtires

195/55 R 16 87 WRSC195/55 R 16 87 V M+S A/S RSC195/55 R 16 87 H M+S RSC

2.8 / 41 2.6 / 38

205/45 R 17 88 V M+S XL A/S RSC205/45 R 17 88 V XLRSC205/40 R 18 86 W XLRSC175/60 R 16 86 H M+S XL RSC205/45 R 17 88 V M+S XL RSC

3.1 / 45 2.9 /42

Tire identification marksTire size205/45 R 17 84 V205: nominal width in mm45: aspect ratio in %R: radial tire code17: rim diameter in inches84: load rating, not for ZR tiresV: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires

Speed letterT = up to 118 mph, 190 km/hH = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h

V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/hW = up to 167 mph, 270 km/hY = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h

Tire Identification NumberDOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0814xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brandxxx: tire size and tire design0814: tire ageTires with DOT codes meet the guidelines ofthe U.S. Department of Transportation.

Tire ageDOT … 0814: the tire was manufactured in the8th week of 2014.

RecommendationRegardless of wear, replace tires at least every6 years.

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicableon the tire sidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width.For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA;Temperature A

DOT Quality GradesTreadwearTraction AA A B CTemperature A B CAll passenger car tires must conform to FederalSafety Requirements in addition to thesegrades.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ernment test course. For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times aswell on the government course as a tire graded

Seite 171

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

171Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 172: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

100. The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use, how‐ever, and may depart significantly from thenorm due to variations in driving habits, servicepractices and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

TractionThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C.Those grades represent the tire's ability to stopon wet pavement as measured under control‐led conditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire markedC may have poor traction performance.The traction grade assigned to this tire is basedon straight-ahead braking traction tests, anddoes not include acceleration, cornering, hy‐droplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

TemperatureThe temperature grades are A, the highest, B,and C, representing the tire's resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditionson a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tirelife, and excessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds toa level of performance which all passenger cartires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi‐cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band Arepresent higher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐quired by law.

Temperature grade for this tireThe temperature grade for this tire is es‐

tablished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐tion, or excessive loading, either separately orin combination, can cause heat buildup andpossible tire failure.If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀

RSC – Run-flat tiresRun-flat tires, refer to page 175, are labeledwith a circular symbol containing the lettersRSC marked on the sidewall.

M+SWinter and all-season tires with better coldweather performance than summer tires.

Tire treadSummer tiresDo not drive with a tire tread depth of less than0.12 in/3 mm.There is an increased danger of hydroplaning ifthe tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.

Winter tiresDo not drive with a tire tread depth of less than0.16 in/4 mm.Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires areless suitable for winter operation.

Minimum tread depth

Wear indicators are distributed around the tire'scircumference and have the legally requiredminimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.

They are marked on the side of the tire withTWI, Tread Wear Indicator.

Seite 172

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

172 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 173: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Tire damageGeneral informationInspect your tires often for damage, foreign ob‐jects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.

HintsDriving over rough or damaged road surfaces,as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles cancause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐pension parts. This is more likely to occur withlow-profile tires, which provide less cushioningbetween the wheel and the road. Be careful toavoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-profile tires.Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐fects:▷ Unusual vibrations during driving.▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐

dency to pull to the left or right.Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving overcurbs, road damage, or similar things.

In case of tire damageIf there are indications of tire damage, re‐

duce your speed immediately and have thewheels and tires checked right away; other‐wise, there is the increased risk of an accident.Drive carefully to the nearest service center.Have the vehicle towed or transported there.Otherwise, tire damage can become life threat‐ening for vehicle occupants and also other roadusers.◀

Repair of tire damageFor safety reasons, the manufacturer of

your vehicle recommends that you do not havedamaged tires repaired; they should be re‐placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐sult.◀

Changing wheels andtiresMounting

Information on mounting tiresHave mounting and balancing performed

only by a service center.If this work is not carried out properly, there isthe danger of subsequent damage and relatedsafety hazards.◀

Wheel and tire combinationInformation on the correct wheel-tire combina‐tion and rim versions for your vehicle can beobtained from your service center.Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impairthe function of a variety of systems such as ABSor DSC.To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐figuration from a single manufacturer.Following tire damage, have the original wheeland tire combination remounted on the vehicleas soon as possible.

Approved wheels and tiresYou should only use wheels and tires that

have been approved by the vehicle manufac‐turer for your vehicle type; otherwise, for ex‐ample, despite having the same official size rat‐ings, variations can lead to body contact andwith it, the risk of severe accidentsThe manufacturer of your vehicle cannot evalu‐ate non-approved wheels and tires to deter‐mine if they are suited for use, and thereforecannot ensure the operating safety of the vehi‐cle if they are mounted.◀

Seite 173

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

173Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 174: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Recommended tire brands

For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐hicle recommends certain tire brands. Thesecan be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.With proper use, these tires meet the higheststandards for safety and handling.

New tiresDue to technical factors associated with theirmanufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac‐tion potential until after an initial breaking-inperiod.Drive conservatively for the first200 miles/300 km.

Retreaded tiresThe manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ommend the use of retreaded tires.

Retreaded tiresPossibly substantial variations in the de‐

sign and age of the tire casing structures canlimit service life and have a negative impact onroad safety.◀

Winter tiresWinter tires are recommended for operating onwinter roads.Although so-called all-season M+S tires do pro‐vide better winter traction than summer tires,they do not provide the same level of perform‐ance as winter tires.

Maximum speed of winter tiresIf the maximum speed of the vehicle is higherthan the permissible speed for the winter tires,then display a corresponding sign in the field ofvision. You can obtain this sign from the tirespecialist or from your service center.

Maximum speed for winter tiresDo not exceed the maximum speed for

the respective winter tires; otherwise, tire dam‐age and accidents can occur.◀

Run-flat tiresIf you are already using run-flat tires, for yourown safety you should replace them only withthe same kind. No spare tire is available in thecase of a flat tire. Your service center will beglad to advise you.

Rotating wheels between axlesDifferent wear patterns can occur on the frontand rear axles depending on individual drivingconditions.The tires can be rotated between the axles toachieve even wear. Your service center will beglad to advise you.After rotating, check the tire pressure and cor‐rect if necessary.

StorageStore wheels and tires in a cool, dry place withas little exposure to light as possible.Always protect tires against all contact with oil,grease and fuels.Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.

Seite 174

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

174 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 175: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Run-flat tiresLabel

RSC label on the tire sidewall.The wheels are composed of tires that are self-supporting to a limited degree.The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re‐main drivable to a restricted degree in theevent of a pressure loss.

Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer topage 99.Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer topage 96.

Changing run-flat tiresFor your own safety, only use run-flat tires. Nospare tire is available in the case of a flat tire.Your service center will be glad to advise you.

Repairing a flat tireSafety measures in case of a breakdownPark the vehicle as far away as possible

from passing traffic and on solid ground.Switch on the hazard warning system.Turn the steering wheel until the front wheelsare in the straight-ahead position and engagethe steering wheel lock.Secure the vehicle against rolling away by set‐ting the parking brake.

Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehi‐cle and ensure that they remain outside the im‐mediate area in a safe place, such as behind aguardrail.If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an ap‐propriate distance.Comply with all safety guidelines and regula‐tions.◀

Mobility SystemThe conceptWith the Mobility System, minor tire damagecan be sealed quickly to enable continuedtravel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumpedinto the tires, which seals the damage from theinside.The compressor can be used to check the tireinflation pressure.

Hints▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐

lity System found on the compressor andsealant bottle.

▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐tive if the tire puncture measures approx.1/8 in/4 mm or more.

▷ Contact the nearest service center if the tirecannot be made drivable.

▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodiesthat have penetrated the tire.

▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealantbottle and apply it to the steering wheel.

▷ The use of a tire sealant can damage theTPM wheel electronics. In this case, havethe electronics checked at the next oppor‐tunity and have them replaced if necessary.

StorageThe Mobility System is located under the cargofloor panel in the cargo area.

Seite 175

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

175Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 176: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Sealant bottle

▷ Sealant bottle, arrow 1.▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.Note the use-by date on the sealant bottle.

Compressor

1 On/off switch2 Holder for bottle3 Reduce inflation pressure4 Inflation pressure dial5 Compressor6 Connector/cable for socket7 Connection hose — stowed in the bottom

of the compressor

Filling the tire with sealant1. Shake the sealant bottle.

2. Take the connection hose completely out ofthe compressor housing. Do not kink thehose.

3. Attach the connection hose to the connec‐tor of the sealing bottle, ensuring that it en‐gages audibly.

Seite 176

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

176 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 177: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

4. Slide the sealing bottle upright into theholder on the compressor housing, ensur‐ing that it engages audibly.

5. Screw the connection hose onto the valveof the defective wheel.

6. With the compressor switched off, insertthe plug into a power socket inside the ve‐hicle.

7. With the ignition turned on or the enginerunning, switch on the compressor.

Let the compressor run for approx. 3 to 8 mi‐nutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve atire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.While the tire is being filled with sealant, the in‐flation pressure may sporadically reach approx.5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor in thisphase.

Enclosed areasDo not let the engine run in enclosed

areas, since breathing in exhaust fumes maylead to loss of consciousness and death. Theexhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, anodorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas.◀

Switch off the compressor after 10 mi‐nutes

Do not allow the compressor to run longer than10 minutes; otherwise, the device will overheatand may be damaged.◀

If a tire pressure of 2 bar is not reached:

1. Switch off the compressor.2. Unscrew the filling hose from the wheel.3. Drive forward and back to distribute the

sealant in the tire.4. Inflate the tire again using the compressor.

If an inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot bereached, contact your service center.

Seite 177

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

177Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 178: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Stowing the Mobility System1. Disconnect the connection hose of the seal‐

ant bottle from the wheel.2. Disconnect the connection hose from the

sealant bottle.3. Wrap the empty sealant bottle and connec‐

tion hose in suitable material to avoid dirty‐ing the cargo area.

4. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi‐cle.

Distributing the sealantImmediately drive to ensure that the sealant isevenly distributed in the tire.Do not exceed a speed of .Do not drop below if possible.

Correcting the tire inflation pressure1. Stop at a suitable location.2. Screw the connection hose onto the tire

valve stem.

3. Attach the connection hose directly to thecompressor.

4. Insert the connector into a power socket in‐side the vehicle.

5. Correct the tire inflation pressure to 2.5 bar.▷ Increase pressure: with the ignition

turned on or the engine running, switchon the compressor.

▷ To reduce the pressure: press the but‐ton on the compressor.

Continuing the tripDo not exceed the maximum permissible speedof 50 mph/80 km/h.Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer topage 97.Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer topage 94.Replace the defective tire and the sealant bot‐tle of the Mobility System as soon as possible.

Snow chainsFine-link snow chainsOnly certain types of fine-link snow chains havebeen tested by the manufacturer of your vehi‐cle, classified as road-safe and approved.Information about the approved snow chainsare available from the service center.

UseUse only in pairs on the front wheels, equippedwith the tires of the following size:▷ 175/65 R 15.

Seite 178

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

178 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 179: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

▷ 175/60 R 16.Follow the chain manufacturer's instructions.Make sure that the snow chains are always suf‐ficiently tight. Retighten as needed accordingto the chain manufacturer's instructions.Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor aftermounting snow chains, as doing so may resultin incorrect readings.Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor aftermounting snow chains, as doing so may resultin incorrect readings.When driving with snow chains, briefly activateDynamic Traction Control if necessary.

Maximum speed with snow chainsDo not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/hwhen using snow chains.

Seite 179

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

179Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 180: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Engine compartmentVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equipment

is also described that is not available in a vehi‐cle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

Important features in the engine compartment

1 Washer fluid reservoir2 Vehicle identification number3 Oil filler neck

4 Jump-starting, positive terminal5 Jump-starting, negative terminal6 Coolant reservoir

HoodHints

Working in the engine compartmentNever attempt to perform any service or

repair operations on your vehicle without thenecessary professional technical training.

If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐lines, have any work on the vehicle performedonly by a service center.If this work is not carried out properly, there isthe danger of subsequent damage and relatedsafety hazards.◀

Seite 180

MOBILITY Engine compartment

180 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 181: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Never reach into the engine compart‐ment

Never reach into the intermediate spaces orgaps in the engine compartment. Otherwise,there is risk of injury, e.g., from rotating or hotparts.◀

Fold down wiper armBefore opening the hood, ensure that the

wiper arms are against the windshield, or thismay result in damage.◀

Opening the hood1. Pull lever in the interior, arrow.

Hood is unlocked

2. After the lever is released, pull the leveragain, arrow.Hood can be opened.

Indicator/warning lampsWhen the hood is opened, a Check Controlmessage is displayed.

Closing the hood

Let the hood drop from a height of approx.16 in/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully.The hood must audibly engage on both sides.

Hood open when drivingIf you see any signs that the hood is not

completely closed while driving, pull over im‐mediately and close it securely.◀

Danger of pinchingMake sure that the closing path of the

hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀

Seite 181

Engine compartment MOBILITY

181Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 182: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Engine oilVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equipmentis also described that is not available in a vehi‐cle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

General informationEngine oil consumption depends on drivingstyle and driving conditions, e.g., if your drivingstyle is very sporty engine oil consumption willbe considerably greater.Therefore, regularly check the engine oil levelafter refueling.The vehicle is equipped with electronic oilmeasurement.The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐uring principles.▷ Status display▷ Detailed measurement

Checking the oil levelelectronicallyStatus display

The conceptThe oil level is monitored electronically duringdriving and shown on the Control Display.If the oil level reaches the minimum level, acheck control message is displayed.

RequirementsA current measured value is available after ap‐prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shortertrip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip isdisplayed.With frequent short-distance trips, perform adetailed measurement.

Displaying the oil level1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Engine oil level"

Oil level display messagesDifferent messages appear on the display de‐pending on the oil level. Pay attention to thesemessages.If the engine oil level is too low, within the next125 miles/200 km add oil, refer to page 183.

Engine oil level too lowAdd oil immediately; otherwise, an insuf‐

ficient amount of engine oil could result in en‐gine damage.◀

Take care not to add too much engine oil.Too much engine oilHave the vehicle checked immediately;

otherwise, surplus oil can lead to engine dam‐age.◀

Detailed measurement

The conceptIn the detailed measurement the oil level ischecked and displayed via a scale.If the oil level reaches the minimum level or anoverfilling is detected, a check control messageis displayed.

Seite 182

MOBILITY Engine oil

182 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 183: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐creased somewhat.

Requirements▷ Vehicle is on level road.▷ Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral

position, clutch and accelerator pedals notdepressed.

▷ Automatic transmission: selector lever intransmission position N or P and accelera‐tor pedal not depressed.

▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐perature.

Performing a detailed measurementIn order to perform a detailed measurement ofthe engine oil level:

1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Measure engine oil level"4. "Start measurement"The oil level is checked and displayed via ascale.Duration: approx. 1 minute.

Adding engine oilGeneral informationSwitch off the ignition and safely park the vehi‐cle before engine oil is added.

Filler neck

Only replenish the maximum oil amount of1 US quart/liter if the signal is displayed in theinstrument cluster.

After refilling, perform a detailed measure‐ment, refer to page 183.

Adding oilAdd oil within the next 125 miles/200 km.

Otherwise, the engine may be damaged.◀

Do not add too much engine oilWhen too much engine oil is added, im‐

mediately have the vehicle checked, otherwise,this may cause engine damage.◀

Protect childrenKeep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐

dren and heed the warnings on the containersto prevent health risks.◀

Oil types for refillingHints

No oil additivesOil additives may lead to engine dam‐

age.◀

Viscosity grades for engine oilsWhen selecting an engine oil, ensure that

the engine oil belongs to one of the viscositygrades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40, and

Seite 183

Engine oil MOBILITY

183Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 184: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

SAE 5W-30 or malfunctions or engine damagemay occur.◀

The engine oil quality is critical for the life of theengine.

Approved oil typesYou can add oils with the following specifica‐tions:Gasoline engine

BMW Longlife-01

BMW Longlife-01 FE

Additional information about the approvedtypes of oils can be requested from the servicecenter.

Alternative oil typesIf the approved engine oils are not available, upto 1 US quart/liter of an oil with the followingspecification can be added:Gasoline engine

API SM or superior grade specification

Engine oil change:The vehicle manufacturer recommends thatyou let the service center change the motor oil.

Seite 184

MOBILITY Engine oil

184 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 185: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

CoolantVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equipmentis also described that is not available in a vehi‐cle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

General informationDanger of burns from hot engineDo not open the cooling system while the

engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant maycause burns.◀

Suitable additivesOnly use suitable additives; otherwise,

engine damage may occur. The additives areharmful to your health.◀

Coolant consists of water and additives.Not all commercially available additives aresuitable for your vehicle. Ask your service cen‐ter for suitable additives.

Coolant levelCheckingThere are yellow Min and Max marks in thecoolant reservoir.

1. Let the engine cool.

2. Turn the coolant reservoir lid counterclock‐wise to unscrew and open it.

3. The coolant level is correct when it is be‐tween these two marks.

Adding1. Let the engine cool.2. Turn the coolant reservoir lid counterclock‐

wise to unscrew and open it.

3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant upto the specified level; do not overfill.

4. Turn the cap.5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐

nated as soon as possible.

DisposalComply with the relevant environmen‐tal protection regulations when dispos‐ing of coolant and coolant additives.

Seite 185

Coolant MOBILITY

185Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 186: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

MaintenanceVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equipmentis also described that is not available in a vehi‐cle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

MINI maintenance systemThe maintenance system indicates requiredmaintenance measures, and thereby providessupport in maintaining road safety and the op‐erational reliability of the vehicle.

Condition Based ServiceCBSSensors and special algorithms take into ac‐count the driving conditions of your vehicle.Based on this, Condition Based Service deter‐mines the maintenance requirements.The system makes it possible to adapt theamount of maintenance you need to your userprofile.Detailed information on service requirements,refer to page 76, can be displayed on the Con‐trol Display.

Service data in the remote controlInformation on the required maintenance iscontinuously stored in the remote control. Yourservice center will read out this data and sug‐gest the right array of service procedures foryour vehicle.Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐mote control that you used most recently.

Storage periodsStorage periods during which the vehicle bat‐tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐count.If this occurs, have a service center update thetime-dependent maintenance procedures, suchas checking brake fluid and, if necessary,changing the engine oil and the microfilter/acti‐vated-charcoal filter.

Service and Warranty In‐formation Booklet forUS models and Warrantyand Service Guide Book‐let for Canadian modelsPlease consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐mation Booklet for US models and Warrantyand Service Guide Booklet for Canadian modelsfor additional information on service require‐ments.Maintenance and repair should be performedby your service center. Make sure to have regu‐lar maintenance procedures recorded in the ve‐hicle's Service and Warranty Information Book‐let for US models, and in the Warranty andService Guide Booklet for Canadian models.These entries are proof of regular maintenance.

Socket for OBD OnboardDiagnosisNote

Socket for Onboard DiagnosisThe socket for onboard diagnostics may

only be used by the service center or a work‐shop that operates in accordance with the

Seite 186

MOBILITY Maintenance

186 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 187: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

specifications of the vehicle manufacturer withcorrespondingly trained personnel and otherauthorized persons. Otherwise, use may resultin operating problems for the vehicle.◀

Position

There is an OBD socket on the driver's side forchecking the primary components in the vehi‐cle emissions.

Emissions▷ The warning lamp lights up:

Emissions are deteriorating. Havethe vehicle checked as soon as pos‐sible.Canadian model: warning light indi‐cates the engine symbol.

▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain cir‐cumstances:This indicates that there is excessive misfir‐ing in the engine.Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐tem checked immediately; otherwise, seri‐ous engine misfiring within a brief periodcan seriously damage emission controlcomponents, in particular the catalytic con‐verter.

Seite 187

Maintenance MOBILITY

187Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 188: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Replacing componentsVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equipmentis also described that is not available in a vehi‐cle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

Onboard vehicle tool kit

The onboard vehicle tool kit is located in thetrough under the cargo area floor.The warning triangle is located in the tailgatetrim.

Wiper blade replacementNote

Do not fold down the wipers withoutwiper blades

Do not fold down the wipers if wiper bladeshave not been installed; this may damage thewindshield.◀

Replacing the wiper blades1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.2. Open the wiper blade lock, arrow.

3. Pull the wiper blade first downward out ofthe holder on the wiper arm, arrow 1.Then pull the wiper blade free from theholder of the wiper arm, arrow 2.

4. Insert and latch a new wiper blade in re‐verse order.

5. Fold down the wipers.Folding down wipers before opening thehood

Before opening the hood, ensure that the wiperarms with the wiper blades are against thewindshield to prevent damage.◀

Seite 188

MOBILITY Replacing components

188 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 189: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Replace the rear wiper blade1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.2. Turn the wiper blade all the way back.

3. Continue turning the wiper blade all theway so that it pops out of the holder.

4. Press the new wiper blade into the holderuntil you hear it snap into place.

5. Fold the wipers in.

Lamp and bulb replace‐mentHints

Lamps and bulbsLamps and bulbs make an essential contribu‐tion to vehicle safety.The manufacturer of the vehicle recommendsthat you entrust corresponding procedures tothe service center if you are unfamiliar withthem or they are not described here.You can obtain a selection of replacementbulbs at the service center.

Danger of burnsOnly change bulbs when they are cool;

otherwise, there is the danger of gettingburned.◀

Working on the lighting systemWhen working on the lighting system,

you should always switch off the lights affectedto prevent short circuits.

To avoid possible injury or equipment damagewhen replacing bulbs, observe any instructionsprovided by the bulb manufacturer.◀

Do not touch the bulbsDo not touch the glass of new bulbs with

your bare hands, as even minute amounts ofcontamination will burn into the bulb's surfaceand reduce its service life.Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar,or hold the bulb by its base.◀

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)Some items of equipment use light-emitting di‐odes installed behind a cover as a light source.These light-emitting diodes, which are relatedto conventional lasers, are officially designatedas Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

Do not remove the coversDo not remove the covers, and never

stare into the unfiltered light for several hours;otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.◀

Headlamp glassCondensation can form on the inside of the ex‐ternal lamps in cool or humid weather. Whendriving with the light switched on, the conden‐sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐lamp glasses do not need to be changed.If the headlamps do not dim despite drivingwith the light switched on, increasing humidityforms, e. g. water droplets in the light, have theservice center check this.

Seite 189

Replacing components MOBILITY

189Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 190: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Front lamps, bulb replacement

At a glance

Halogen headlamps

1 Low beams/high beams2 Turn signal

LED headlamps

1 Daytime running lights2 Low beams/high beams3 Turn signal

Bug light

1 Parking lamps2 Daytime running lights3 Fog lamps

LED bug light

1 Parking lamps2 Fog lamps

Low beams/high beamsFollow the general instructions on Lamps andbulbs, refer to page 189.

Seite 190

MOBILITY Replacing components

190 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 191: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Bulbs: H4

1. Open the hood, refer to page 181.2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow 1, and

remove.

3. Pull off the connector.

4. Unclip spring clip, arrow 1, and fold down.5. Remove the bulb from the headlamp hous‐

ing.6. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in

the reverse order.

Turn signalFollow the general instructions on Lamps andbulbs, refer to page 189.Bulbs: PW24W

With white turn signal lamps: PWY24W

1. Turn the steering wheel.2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow 1, and

remove.

3. Unscrew the inner cap counterclockwise,and remove it.

4. Pull bulb socket out of the bulb housing; ifnecessary, loosen it with small tilting move‐ments if possible.

5. Pull the bulb out of the fixture.6. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in

the reverse order.

Seite 191

Replacing components MOBILITY

191Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 192: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Parking lamps/fog lamps/daytimerunning lightsFollow the general instructions on Lamps andbulbs, refer to page 189.Bulbs:▷ Parking lamps for halogen headlamps:

W5WParking lamps for LED headlamps:W5W NBV

▷ Daytime running light: PSX24W▷ Fog lamp: H81. Turn the steering wheel.2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow 2, and

remove.

3. Remove the corresponding connector.4. ▷ Remove bulb socket of the parking

lamp, arrow 1, by turning it counter‐clockwise.Pull the bulb out of the fixture.

▷ Remove the bulb socket of the daytimerunning lights, arrow 2, by pressing to‐gether the top and bottom latch mech‐anism.For better accessibility, if necessary, re‐move the bulb of the fog lamp before‐hand.

▷ Turn the bulb socket of the fog lampcounterclockwise, arrow 3, and re‐move.

5. Insert the new bulbs and install the cover inthe reverse order.When installing the daytime running lights,audibly latch the bulb socket first at thebottom, then at the top.

Tail lamps, bulb replacement

At a glance

Vehicles with a rear fog lamp

1 Side tail lamps2 Rear fog lamp3 License plate lamp4 High brake lights

Seite 192

MOBILITY Replacing components

192 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 193: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Vehicle with two rear fog lamps

1 Side tail lamps2 Rear fog lamps3 License plate lamp4 High brake lights

Side tail lamps

1 Brake lights/tail lights2 Turn signal3 Reversing lights

Side LED tail lamps

1 Brake lights/tail lights2 Turn signal3 Reversing lights

Side tail lampsFollow the general instructions on lamps andbulbs, refer to page 189.Bulbs: P21W

1. Open the tailgate., refer to page 392. Remove left or right cover.

3. Through the opening, loosen the plug con‐nector, arrow 2 on the bulb holder.

Seite 193

Replacing components MOBILITY

193Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 194: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Push apart the latches, arrows 1, and re‐move the bulb holder.

4. Remove the bulb holder from the opening.5. Press the defective bulb gently into the

socket, turn clockwise and remove.▷ Arrow 1: brake lights/tail lights▷ Arrow 2: turn signal▷ Arrow 3: reversing light

6. Proceed in the reverse order to insert thenew bulb and attach the bulb holder. Makesure that the bulb holder engages in all fas‐teners.

Central brake lamp and license platelampFollow the general instructions on lamps andbulbs, refer to page 189.The lamps feature LED technology. Contactyour service center in the event of a malfunc‐tion.

Vehicles with a rear fog lampFollow the general instructions on Lamps andbulbs, refer to page 189.

Bulbs: W16W

1. On vehicles with heat shield:Loosen 3 screws, arrow.

2. Push the heat shield forward and thebumper back in order to be able to reachthe fog lamp.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andremove.The wire is long enough to guide the socketdown and through between any heat shieldthat may be installed and the bumper.

4. Replace defective bulb.5. To install the new bulb, proceed in reverse

order of removal.

Vehicle with two rear fog lampsFollow the general instructions on Lamps andbulbs, refer to page 189.Bulbs: W16WLeft rear fog lamp:

1. On vehicles with heat shield:

Seite 194

MOBILITY Replacing components

194 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 195: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Loosen 3 screws, arrow.

2. Push the heat shield forward and thebumper back in order to be able to reachthe fog lamp.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andremove.The wire is long enough to guide the socketdown and through between any heat shieldthat may be installed and the bumper.

4. Replace defective bulb.5. To install the new bulb, proceed in reverse

order of removal.Right fog lamp:

1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andremove.

The wire is long enough to guide the socketdown and through between any heat shieldthat may be installed and the bumper.

2. Replace defective bulb.3. To install the new bulb, proceed in reverse

order of removal.

Side turn signal, bulb replacementFollow the general instructions on Lamps andbulbs, refer to page 189.Bulbs:▷ With orange lens: W5W

Seite 195

Replacing components MOBILITY

195Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 196: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

▷ With white lens: WY5W diadem1. Push turn signal housing up and pull out at

the bottom.

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andremove.

3. Replace the bulb.4. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the

new bulb and install the turn signal hous‐ing.First hook the turn signal housing to thebottom, then at the top press it into thelatch.

Changing wheelsHintsThe vehicle equipment does not include aspare tire.When using run-flat tires or tire sealants, a tiredoes not need to be changed immediately inthe event of pressure loss due to a flat tire.The tools for changing wheels are available asaccessories from your service center.

Jacking points for the vehicle jack

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐cated at the positions shown.

Compact wheel

HintsSafety measures in case of a breakdownor a wheel change

▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possiblefrom passing traffic and on solid ground.Switch on the hazard warning system.

▷ Set the parking brake, and engage first gearor transmission position P.

▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of thevehicle and ensure that they remain out‐side the immediate area in a safe place,such as behind a guardrail.

▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle orportable hazard warning lamp at an appro‐priate distance. Comply with all safetyguidelines and regulations.

▷ Perform wheel change only on a flat, solidand slip-resistant surface. On soft or slip‐pery ground, e.g., snow, ice, tiles, etc., thevehicle or vehicle jack can slip away to theside.

▷ Do not place wood blocks or similar itemsunder the vehicle jack; otherwise, it cannotreach its carrying capacity because of therestricted height.

▷ If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under thevehicle and do not start the engine; other‐wise, a mortal hazard exists.◀

Seite 196

MOBILITY Replacing components

196 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 197: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Use the vehicle jack only for changingwheels

Use the vehicle jack only for changing wheelsDo not attempt to use it to jack up a differenttype of vehicle or loads of any kind; otherwise,this could cause material damage and personalinjury.◀

Removing compact wheelThe compact wheel is housed in a well on theunderbody of the vehicle. The screw connec‐tion of the compact wheel is located in thecargo area under the floor mat, on the floor ofthe storage compartment for the wheel chang‐ing set.

1. Loosen the nut from the wheel change setusing the wheel wrench.

2. Remove the retaining plate.3. Screw the wheel wrench on the threads

and loosen the lock clockwise rotation.Compact wheel releases and must be heldwith the wheel wrench.

4. Lower the compact wheel with the wheelwrench.

5. Unscrewing the wheel wrench6. Pull out the well with compact wheel under

the vehicle toward the rear.7. Remove the spacer and compact wheel of

the well.8. Stow the well and spacer in the vehicle.

Prepare wheel change1. Follow the Safety instructions, refer to

page 196.2. With the wheel chock from the wheel

change set, also secure the vehicle againstrolling away at the front wheel of the oppo‐site side.

3. Loosen the wheel lug bolts a half turn.Lug bolt lock, refer to page 198

Jacking up the vehicle1. Place the vehicle jack at the jacking point

closest to the wheel such that the vehiclejack foot is vertically beneath the vehiclejacking point with the entire surface on theground.

2. Insert the vehicle jack head in the rectan‐gular recess of the jacking point for crank‐ing it up.

3. Crank it up until the wheel in question liftsoff of the ground.

Seite 197

Replacing components MOBILITY

197Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 198: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Wheel mounting1. Unscrew the wheel lug bolts and remove

the wheel.2. Put the new wheel or compact wheel on

and screw in at least two bolts.If original MINI light alloy wheels are notmounted, any accompanying lug bolts alsohave to be used.

3. Screw in the remaining the lug bolts andtighten all bolts well in a crosswise pattern.

4. Lower the vehicle and remove the vehiclejack.

After the wheel change1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tight‐

ening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.Check for secure seating of the lugbolts

For safety reasons, have the secure seatingof the lug bolts checked with a calibratedtorque wrench; otherwise, a safety hazardresults from incorrectly tightened lugbolts.◀

2. Stow the defective wheel in the cargo area.The defective wheel cannot be stored in thecompact wheel bracket because of its size.

3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐portunity and correct as needed.

4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer topage 98.Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor, referto page 95.

5. Replace the damaged tires as soon as pos‐sible.

Driving with the compact wheelWatch the speed when driving with thecompact wheel

Drive conservatively and do not exceed a speedof 50 mph/80 km/h; otherwise, changed drivingcharacteristics such as reduced lane stability

while braking, extended braking distance andchanged self-steering properties in the limitarea.◀

Mounting only one compact wheelOnly a single compact wheel may be

mounted. Reinstall wheels and tires of the orig‐inal size as quickly as possible; otherwise, thereis a safety risk.◀

Lug bolt lockThe adapter of the lug bolt lock is located in theonboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 188.

▷ Lug bolt, arrow 1.▷ Adapter, arrow 2.

Removing1. Attach the adapter to the wheel lug.2. Unscrew the lug bolt.Remove the adapter after screwing the lug boltback on.

Vehicle batteryMaintenanceThe battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec‐trolyte will last for the life of the battery.Your service center will be glad to advise youon questions regarding the battery.

Seite 198

MOBILITY Replacing components

198 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 199: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Battery replacementUse approved vehicle batteries onlyOnly use vehicle batteries that have been

approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer;otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged andsystems or functions may not be fully availa‐ble.◀

After a battery replacement, have the batteryregistered on the vehicle by your service centerto ensure that all comfort functions are fullyavailable and that any Check Control messagesare no longer displayed.

Charging the battery

NoteDo not connect charging devices to the12 volt socket in the vehicle

Do not connect battery chargers to the factory-installed 12 volt sockets in the vehicle as thismay damage the vehicle battery due to an in‐creased power consumption.◀

General informationMake sure that the battery is always sufficientlycharged to guarantee that the battery remainsusable for its full service life.The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐lowing cases:▷ When making frequent short-distance

drives.▷ If the vehicle is not used for prolonged peri‐

ods, longer than a month.▷ Automatic transmission: when parked for

long periods of time in selector lever posi‐tion D, R or N.

Starting aid terminalsIn the vehicle, only charge the battery via thestarting aid terminals, refer to page 202, in theengine compartment with the engine off.

Power failureAfter a temporary power loss, some equipmentneeds to be reinitialized.Individual settings need to be reprogrammed:▷ Time: update.▷ Date: update.

Disposing of old batteriesHave old batteries disposed of by yourservice center or bring them to a recy‐cling center.

Maintain the battery in an upright position fortransport and storage. Secure the battery sothat it does not tip over during transport.

FusesHints

Replacing fusesNever attempt to repair a blown fuse and

do not replace a defective fuse with a substi‐tute of another color or amperage rating; thiscould lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re‐sulting in a fire in the vehicle.◀

Replacing fuseThe fuses are located in the passenger footwellunder the dashboard.

1. To open, loosen screws, arrow 1.

2. Fold down the fuse holder, arrow 2.

Seite 199

Replacing components MOBILITY

199Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 200: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Information on the fuse types and locationsis found on a separate sheet.

3. Replace the fuse in question.4. The installation is done in reverse order

from the removal.

Seite 200

MOBILITY Replacing components

200 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 201: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Breakdown assistanceVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equipmentis also described that is not available in a vehi‐cle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

Hazard warning flash‐ers

The button is located above the Control Dis‐play.

Intelligent Emergency Re‐questRequirements▷ The radio ready state is switched on.▷ The Assist system is functional.▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has

been activated.

General informationOnly press the SOS button in an emergency.

HintsEmergency Request not guaranteedFor technical reasons, the Emergency Re‐

quest cannot be guaranteed under unfavorableconditions.◀

Initiating an Emergency Request

1. Press the cover briefly to open it.2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the

button lights up.▷ The LED lights up: an Emergency Request

was initiated.If the situation allows, wait in your vehicleuntil the voice connection has been estab‐lished.

▷ The LED flashes when a connection to theMINI Response Center has been estab‐lished.When the emergency request is received atthe MINI Response Center, the MINI Re‐sponse Center contacts you and takes fur‐ther steps to help you.Even if you are unable to respond, the MINIResponse Center can take further steps tohelp you under certain circumstances.For this purpose, data that are used to de‐termine the necessary rescue measures,such as the current position of the vehicle ifit can be established, are transmitted to theMINI Response Center.

Seite 201

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

201Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 202: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

▷ If the LED is flashing but the MINI ResponseCenter cannot be heard on the speaker, thehands-free system may be malfunctioning.However, the MINI Response Center maystill be able to hear you.

Initiating an Emergency RequestautomaticallyUnder certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐fication is not affected by pressing the SOSbutton.

Warning triangle

The warning triangle is located in the tailgate.To remove, loosen the brackets.

First aid kitThe first aid kit is located in the cargo area.Some of the articles have a limited service life.Check the expiration dates of the contents reg‐ularly and replace any expired items promptly.

Roadside AssistanceService availabilityRoadside Assistance can be reached around theclock in many countries. You can obtain assis‐

tance there in the event of a vehicle break‐down.

Jump-startingHintsIf the battery is discharged, an engine can bestarted using the battery of another vehicle andtwo jumper cables. Only use jumper cables withfully insulated clamp handles.To prevent personal injury or damage to bothvehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐dure.

Do not touch live partsTo avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury,

always avoid all contact with electrical compo‐nents while the engine is running.◀

Preparation1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐

hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This informa‐tion can be found on the battery.

2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐cle.

3. Switch off any electronic systems/powerconsumers in both vehicles.

Bodywork contact between vehiclesMake sure that there is no contact be‐

tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other‐wise, there is the danger of short circuits.◀

Starting aid terminalsConnecting orderConnect the jumper cables in the correct

order; otherwise, there is the danger of injuryfrom sparking.◀

Seite 202

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

202 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 203: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

The so-called starting aid terminal in the enginecompartment acts as the battery's positive ter‐minal.Open the cap of the starting aid terminal.

The body ground acts as the negative terminalof the battery.

Connecting the cables1. Pull off the cap of the starting aid terminal.2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive

jumper cable to the positive terminal of thebattery, or to the corresponding starting aidterminal of the vehicle providing assistance.

3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other endof the cable to the positive terminal of thebattery, or to the corresponding starting aidterminal of the vehicle to be started.

4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negativejumper cable to the negative terminal ofthe battery, or to the corresponding engineor body ground of assisting vehicle.

5. Attach the second terminal clamp to thenegative terminal of the battery, or to the

corresponding engine or body ground ofthe vehicle to be started.

Starting the engineNever use spray fluids to start the engine.

1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle andlet it run for several minutes at an increasedidle speed.If the vehicle to be started has a diesel en‐gine: let the engine of the assisting vehiclerun for approx. 10 minutes.

2. Start the engine of the vehicle to be startedin the usual way.If the first starting attempt is not successful,wait a few minutes before making anotherattempt in order to allow the dischargedbattery to recharge.

3. Let both engines run for several minutes.4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse

order.Check the battery and recharge if necessary.

Tow-starting and towingNote

Tow-starting and towingWhen tow-starting and towing the vehi‐

cle, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems;otherwise, improper behavior of the brakingfunction of individual systems could result in anaccident.◀

Switching off Intelligent Safety systems, refer topage 99.

Automatic transmission: transportingyour vehicle

NoteYour vehicle must not be towed if the frontwheels are touching the ground. Therefore,

Seite 203

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

203Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 204: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

contact a service center in the event of a break‐down.

Tow the vehicle only with the front axleraised

Have the vehicle towed only with the front axleraised or transported on a loading platform;otherwise, damage may occur.◀

Tow truck

Have your vehicle transported with a tow truckwith a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

Do not lift the vehicleDo not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or

body and chassis parts; otherwise, damagemay result.◀

Use the tow fitting screwed in at the front formaneuvering the vehicle only.

Manual transmission

Observe before towing your vehicleGearshift lever in neutral position.

TowingWhen the parking brake is blockedThe parking brake cannot be released

manually.Do not tow the vehicle with the parking brakeblocked, or the vehicle can be damaged.Contact your service center.◀

Follow the towing instructionsFollow all towing instructions; otherwise,

vehicle damage or accidents may occur.◀

▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on;otherwise, the low beams, tail lamps, turnsignals, and windshield wipers may be un‐available.

▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axletilted, as the front wheels could turn.

▷ When the engine is stopped, there is nopower assist. Consequently, more forceneeds to be applied when braking andsteering.

▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐quired.

▷ The towing vehicle must not be lighter thanthe vehicle being towed; otherwise, it willnot be possible to control the vehicle re‐sponse.

Tow truck

Have your vehicle transported with a tow truckwith a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

Do not lift the vehicleDo not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or

body and chassis parts; otherwise, damagemay result.◀

Seite 204

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

204 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 205: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Towing other vehicles

General informationLight towing vehicleThe towing vehicle must not be lighter

than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it willnot be possible to control the vehicle re‐sponse.◀

Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctlyAttach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow

fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts maycause damage.◀

▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐pending on local regulations.

▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearlyidentify the vehicle being towed by placinga sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐dow.

Tow barThe tow fittings used should be on the sameside on both vehicles.Should it prove impossible to avoid mountingthe tow bar at an offset angle, please observethe following:▷ Maneuvering capability is limited during

cornering.▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it

is secured with an offset.

Tow ropeWhen starting to tow the vehicle, make surethat the tow rope is taut.To avoid jerking and the associated stresses onthe vehicle components when towing, alwaysuse nylon ropes or nylon straps.

Attaching the tow rope correctlyOnly secure the tow rope on the tow fit‐

ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it issecured on other parts of the vehicle.◀

Tow fitting

The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at thefront or rear of the MINI. It is located in thecargo area under the cargo floor panel in theonboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 188.

Tow fitting, information on use▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with

the vehicle and screw it all the way in.▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved

roads only.▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,

do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and thevehicle can occur.◀

Screw thread

Threaded holes for the tow fitting are located inthe front and rear of the vehicle on the rightside with respect to the direction of travel.Push out the cover by pressing on the top edge.

Seite 205

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

205Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 206: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Tow-starting

Automatic transmissionDo not tow-start the vehicle.Due to the automatic transmission, the enginecannot be started by tow-starting.Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem‐edied.

Manual transmissionIf possible, do not tow-start the vehicle butstart the engine by jump-starting, refer topage 202. If the vehicle is equipped with a cat‐alytic converter, only tow-start while the engineis cold.

1. Switch on the hazard warning system andcomply with local regulations.

2. Ignition, refer to page 59, on.3. Engage third gear.4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the

clutch pedal pressed and slowly release thepedal. After the engine starts, immediatelypress on the clutch pedal again.

5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the towbar or rope, and switch off the hazardwarning system.

6. Have the vehicle checked.

Seite 206

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

206 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 207: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

CareVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equipmentis also described that is not available in a vehi‐cle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

Car washesHints

Steam jets or high-pressure washersWhen using steam jets or high-pressure

washers, hold them a sufficient distance awayand use a maximum temperature of140 ℉/60 ℃.If the vehicle has a glass sunroof, ensure that adistance of at least 31.5 inches/80 cm is main‐tained. Holding them too close or using exces‐sively high pressures or temperatures cancause damage or preliminary damage that maythen lead to long-term damage.Follow the user's manual for the high-pressurewasher.◀

Cleaning sensors/cameras with high-pres‐sure washers

When using high-pressure washers, do notspray the exterior sensors and cameras, e.g.,Park Distance Control, for extended periods oftime and only from a distance of at least12 in/30 cm.◀

▷ Regularly remove foreign items such asleaves in the area below the windshieldwhen the hood is raised.

▷ Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly inwinter.

Intense soiling and road salt can damagethe vehicle.

Automatic car washes

Hints▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or

those that use soft brushes in order toavoid paint damage.

▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are notdamaged by the transport mechanisms.

▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, theymay be damaged, depending on the widthof the vehicle.

▷ Unscrew the rod antenna.▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to

page 65, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐vation.

▷ In some cases, an unintentional alarm canbe triggered by the interior motion sensorof the alarm system. Follow the instructionson avoiding an unintentional alarm, refer topage 43.

Guide rails in car washesAvoid car washes with guide rails higher

than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle bodycould be damaged.◀

Before driving into a car washIn order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in acar wash, take the following steps:Manual transmission:

1. Drive into the car wash.2. Shift to neutral.3. Switch the engine off.4. Switch on the ignition.

Seite 207

Care MOBILITY

207Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 208: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Automatic transmission:

1. Drive into the car wash.2. Engage transmission position N.3. Press the Start/Stop button to switch off the

engine.In this way, the ignition remains switchedon, and two Check-Control messages aredisplayed.

A signal sounds when you leave the vehiclewhile in gear position N.The vehicle cannot be locked from the outsidewhen in transmission position N. A signal issounded when an attempt is made to lock thevehicle.To start the engine:

1. Depress the brake pedal.2. Press the Start/Stop button.

Headlamps▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or

caustic cleansers.▷ Soak areas that have been soiled, e.g., due

to insects, with shampoo and wash off withwater.

▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use anice scraper.

After washing the vehicleAfter washing the vehicle, apply the brakesbriefly to dry them; otherwise, braking actioncan be reduced and corrosion of the brakediscs can occur.Completely remove all residues on the win‐dows, to minimize loss of visibility due tosmearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiperblade wear.

Vehicle careCar care productsMINI recommends using cleaning and careproducts from MINI, since these have beentested and approved.

Car care and cleaning productsFollow the instructions on the container.

When cleaning the interior, open the doors orwindows.Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐cles.Cleansers can contain substances that are dan‐gerous and harmful to your health.◀

Vehicle paintRegular care contributes to driving safety andvalue retention. Environmental influences inareas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐quency and extent of your car care to theseinfluences.Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,grease or bird droppings must be removed im‐mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐tered or discolored.

Leather careRemove dust from the leather often, using acloth or vacuum cleaner.Otherwise, particles of dust and road grimechafe in pores and folds, and lead to increasedwear and premature degradation of the leathersurface.To guard against discoloration, such as fromclothing, provide leather care roughly everytwo months.Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐cause soiling on such surfaces is substantiallymore visible.

Seite 208

MOBILITY Care

208 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 209: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt andgrease will gradually break down the protectivelayer of the leather surface.Suitable care products are available from theservice center.

Upholstery material careVacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, usea soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitableinterior cleaner.Clean the upholstery down to the seams usinglarge sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐terial vigorously.

Damage from Velcro® fastenersOpen Velcro® fasteners on pants or other

articles of clothing can damage the seat covers.Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.◀

Caring for special components

Light-alloy wheelsWhen cleaning the vehicle, use only neutralwheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9.Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steamjets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐turer's instructions.Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agentscan destroy the protective layer of adjacentcomponents, such as the brake disk.

Chrome surfacesCarefully clean components such as the radia‐tor grille or door handles with an ample supplyof water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐ularly when they have been exposed to roadsalt.

Rubber componentsAside from water, treat only with rubber cleans‐ers.

When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any sili‐con-containing car care products in order toavoid damage or reduced noise damping.

Fine wood partsClean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with asoft cloth.

Plastic componentsThese include:▷ Imitation leather surfaces.▷ Headliner.▷ Lamp lenses.▷ Instrument cluster cover.▷ Matte black spray-coated components.▷ Painted parts in the interior.Clean with a microfiber cloth.Lightly dampen the cloth with water.Do not soak the headliner.

Do not use cleansers that contain alcoholor solvents

Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol orsolvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-dutygrease removers, fuel, or such; this could leadto surface damage.◀

Safety beltsDirty belt straps impede the reeling action andthus have a negative impact on safety.

Chemical cleaningDo not clean chemically; this can destroy

the webbing.◀

Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safetybelts clipped into their buckles.Do not allow the reels to retract the safety beltsuntil they are dry.

Seite 209

Care MOBILITY

209Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 210: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Carpets and floor matsNo objects in the area around the pedalsKeep floor mats, carpets, and any other

objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;otherwise, the function of the pedals could beimpeded while driving and create the risk of anaccident.Do not place additional floor mats over existingmats or other objects.Only use floor mats that have been approvedfor the vehicle and can be properly fixed inplace.Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastenedagain after they were removed for cleaning, forexample.◀

Floor mats can be removed from the passengercompartment for cleaning.If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with amicrofiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back andforth in the direction of travel only.

Sensors/camerasTo clean sensors and cameras, use a clothmoistened with a small amount of glasscleaner.

Displays/Screens/Projection lensesCleaning displays and screensDo not use any chemical or household

cleaning agents; otherwise, surfaces can be af‐fected.◀

Keeping out moistureKeep all fluids and moisture away from

the unit; otherwise, electrical components canbe damaged.◀

Avoid pressureAvoid pressing too hard when cleaning

and do not use abrasive materials; otherwise,damage can result.◀

Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.For stubborn soiling on the projection lens ofthe Head-up Display, dampen the microfibercloth with alcohol. Extending projection lens,refer to page 84.

Long-term vehicle storageWhen the vehicle is shut down for longer thanthree months, special measures must be taken.Additional information is available from theservice center.

Seite 210

MOBILITY Care

210 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 211: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Seite 211

Care MOBILITY

211Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 212: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

FIND ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 213: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 214: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Technical dataVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equipment

is also described that is not available in a vehi‐cle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

Dimensions

MINI

Width with mirrors inches/mm 76.1/1932

Width without mirrors inches/mm 68.0/1727

Height with roof antenna inches/mm 55.7/1414

Length inches/mm 151.1/3837

Cooper S: length inches/mm 151.9/3858

Wheelbase inches/mm 98.2/2495

Smallest turning circle diam. ft/m 35/10.8

WeightsThe values preceding the slash apply to vehicleswith manual transmission; the values following

the slash apply to vehicles with automatictransmission.

MINI Cooper

Curb weight, road ready, with 75 kg load, with fueltank 90 % full, without special equipment

lbskg

2605/26751182/1213

Approved gross vehicle weight lbskg

3455/35201567/1597

Load lbskg

680305

Approved front axle load lbskg

1905/1975864/896

Seite 214

REFERENCE Technical data

214 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 215: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

MINI Cooper

Approved rear axle load lbskg

1665/1665755/755

Approved roof load capacity lbskg

6060

Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 8.7/211

MINI Cooper S

Curb weight, road ready, with 75 kg load, with fueltank 90 % full, without special equipment

lbskg

2760/27951252/1268

Approved gross vehicle weight lbskg

3620/36501642/1656

Load lbskg

770/775349/352

Approved front axle load lbskg

2010/2045912/928

Approved rear axle load lbskg

1690/1690767/767

Approved roof load capacity lbskg

6060

Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 8.7/211

Capacities

MINI

Cooper: fuel tank US gal/liters 10.5/40

Fuel tank US gal/liters 11.6/44

Seite 215

Technical data REFERENCE

215Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 216: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

AppendixAny updates to the Owner's Handbook for Ve‐hicle are listed here.

Seite 216

REFERENCE Appendix

216 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 217: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Seite 217

REFERENCE

217Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 218: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Seite 218

REFERENCE

218 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Additional License Textsand CertificationsTire Pressure Monitoring System

IsraelA. The use of this product does not need a wi‐reless operation license.B. The product does not include an RF disturb‐ance protection, and should not disturb otherlicensed products.C. It is forbidden to replace the antenna or tomake any change in this product.

Australia/New Zealand

RussiaC-DE-ML05.H01232

South Africa

ChinaIn accordance with the provisions on the RadioRegulations of the people's Republic of China,the radio transmission equipment, after exami‐nation, conforms to the provisions with itsCMIIT ID: 2013DJ7376

Page 219: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Seite 219

REFERENCE

219Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 220: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Everything from A to ZIndexAABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐

tem 106 ACC, Active Cruise Control 110 Acceleration Assistant, refer to

Launch Control 70 Accessories and parts 7 Activated-charcoal filter 132 Active cruise control, ACC 110 Additives, oil 183 Adjusting the headlamps 89 Adjustments, seats/head re‐

straints 47 Adjustments, steering

wheel 54 After washing vehicle 208 Airbags 91 Airbags, indicator/warning

light 92 Air circulation, refer to Recir‐

culated-air mode 128, 131 Air conditioner 127 Air, dehumidifying, refer to

Cooling function 128, 131 Air distribution,

manual 128, 130 Air flow, air conditioner 128 Air flow, automatic climate

control 130 Air pressure, tires 168 Air vents, refer to Ventila‐

tion 132 Alarm system 42 Alarm triggering 42 Alarm, unintentional 43 All around the center con‐

sole 16 All around the headliner 17 All around the steering

wheel 14

All-season tires, refer to Win‐ter tires 174

Alternating-code hand-heldtransmitter 134

Alternative oil types 184 Antifreeze, washer fluid 66 Antilock Brake System,

ABS 106 Anti-slip control, refer to

DSC 106 Approved axle load 214 Approved engine oils 184 Arrival time 80 Ash tray 138 Assistance, Roadside Assis‐

tance 202 Assistance when driving

off 109 Assist system, refer to Intelli‐

gent Safety 99 AUTO intensity 130 Automatic car wash 207 Automatic climate con‐

trol 129 Automatic cruise control with

Stop & Go 110 Automatic Curb Monitor 52 Automatic deactivation, front

passenger airbags 93 Automatic headlamp con‐

trol 87 Automatic locking 42 Automatic recirculated-air

control 131 Automatic transmission with

Steptronic 67 AUTO program, automatic cli‐

mate control 130 AUTO program, intensity 130 Auto Start/Stop function 61 Average fuel consumption 79

Average speed 80 Axle loads, weights 214

BBackrest curvature, refer to

Lumbar support 48 Band-aids, refer to First aid

kit 202 Bar for tow-starting/

towing 205 Battery replacement, vehicle

battery 199 Battery, vehicle 198 Belts, safety belts 49 Beverage holder, cu‐

pholder 142 Bonus range, GREEN

mode 158 Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐

pholder 142 Brake assistant 106 Brake discs, breaking in 148 Brake pads, breaking in 148 Braking, hints 149 Breakdown assis‐

tance 201, 202 Breaking in 148 Brightness of Control Dis‐

play 82 Bug light 190 Bulb replacement 189 Bulb replacement, front 190 Bulb replacement, rear 192 Bulb replacement, side 195 Bulbs and lamps 189 Button, RES 112 Button, Start/Stop 59 Bypassing, refer to Jump-

starting 202

Seite 220

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

220 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 221: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

CCalifornia Proposition 65

Warning 7 Camera-based cruise control,

ACC 110 Camera, care 210 Camera, rearview cam‐

era 120 Can holder, refer to Cu‐

pholder 142 Car battery 198 Car care products 208 Care, displays 210 Care, vehicle 208 Cargo 151 Cargo area 138 Cargo area, adapting size 143 Cargo area, enlarging 139 Cargo area lid 39 Cargo area, storage compart‐

ments 143 Cargo cover 138 Cargo, securing 152 Cargo straps, securing

cargo 152 Car key, refer to Remote con‐

trol 34 Carpet, care 210 Car wash 207 Catalytic converter, refer to

Hot exhaust system 149 CBS Condition Based Serv‐

ice 186 Center armrest 142 Center console 16 Central screen, refer to Control

Display 18 Changes, technical, refer to

Safety 7 Changing parts 188 Changing wheels 196 Changing wheels/tires 173 Check Control 72 Children, seating position 55

Children, transportingsafely 55

Child restraint fixing sys‐tem 55

Child restraint fixing systemLATCH 56

Child restraint fixing systems,mounting 55

Child seat, mounting 55 Child seats 55 Chrome parts, care 209 Cigarette lighter 138 Cleaning, displays 210 Climate control 127, 129 Clock 75 Closing/opening via door

lock 38 Closing/opening with remote

control 37 Clothes hooks 143 Coasting 159 Coasting with engine decou‐

pled, coasting 159 Coasting with idling en‐

gine 159 Cold starting, refer to Starting

the engine 60 Collision warning with City

Braking function 100 Combination switch, refer to

Turn signals 64 Combination switch, refer to

Wiper system 64 Comfort Access 40 Compact wheel 196 Compartments in the

doors 142 Compass 135 Compressor 175 Computer 79 Condensation on win‐

dows 131 Condensation under the vehi‐

cle 150 Condition Based Service

CBS 186

Configuring drive pro‐gram 109

Confirmation signal 42 Control Display 18 Control Display, settings 81 Controller 18, 19 Control systems, driving stabil‐

ity 106 Convenient opening 37 Coolant 185 Coolant temperature 74 Cooling function 128, 131 Cooling, maximum 130 Cooling system 185 Cornering lamp 87 Corrosion on brake discs 150 Cruise control 116 Cruise control, active 110 Cruise control, refer to cam‐

era-based cruise control 110 Cruising range 75 Cupholder 142 Current fuel consumption 75

DDamage, tires 173 Damping control, dy‐

namic 107 Data, technical 214 Date 75 Daytime running lights 87 Defrosting, refer to defrosting

the windows 128 Defrosting, refer to Windows,

defrosting 131 Defrosting the windows 128 Dehumidifying, air 128, 131 Destination distance 80 Diesel particulate filter 149 Digital clock 75 Digital compass 135 Dimensions 214 Dimmable exterior mirrors 53 Dimmable interior rearview

mirror 53

Seite 221

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

221Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 222: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Direction indicator, refer toTurn signals 64

Display, electronic, instrumentcluster 72

Display lighting, refer to In‐strument lighting 89

Displays 71 Displays, cleaning 210 Disposal, coolant 185 Disposal, vehicle battery 199 Distance control, refer to

PDC 118 Distance to destination 80 Divided screen view, split

screen 23 Door lock, refer to Remote

control 34 Drive mode, GREEN

mode 156 Drive-off assistant 109 Drive-off assistant, refer to

DSC 106 Driving Dynamics Control 108 Driving Excitement, SPORT 80 Driving instruction, GREEN

mode 158 Driving instructions, breaking

in 148 Driving mode 108 Driving notes, general 148 Driving stability control sys‐

tems 106 Driving style analysis 160 Driving tips 148 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐

trol 106 DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐

trol 107 Dynamic Damping Con‐

trol 107 Dynamic Stability Control

DSC 106 Dynamic Traction Control

DTC 107

EElectronic displays, instrument

cluster 72 Electronic Stability Program

ESP, refer to DSC 106 Emergency detection, remote

control 35 Emergency release, fuel filler

flap 164 Emergency Request 201 Emergency service, refer to

Roadside Assistance 202 Emergency start function, en‐

gine start 35 Emergency unlocking, door

lock 39 Energy Control 75 Engine, automatic Start/Stop

function 61 Engine, automatic switch-

off 61 Engine compartment 180 Engine compartment, working

in 180 Engine coolant 185 Engine idling when driving,

coasting 159 Engine oil 182 Engine oil, adding 183 Engine oil additives 183 Engine oil change 184 Engine oil filler neck 183 Engine oil temperature 74 Engine oil types, alterna‐

tive 184 Engine oil types, ap‐

proved 184 Engine start during malfunc‐

tion 35 Engine start, jump-start‐

ing 202 Engine start, refer to Starting

the engine 60 Engine stop 60 Engine temperature 74

Entering a car wash 207 Equipment, interior 133 ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐

gram, refer to DSC 106 Exchanging wheels/tires 173 Exhaust system 149 Exterior mirror, automatic

dimming feature 53 Exterior mirrors 52 External start 202 External temperature dis‐

play 75 External temperature warn‐

ing 75 Eyes for securing cargo 152

FFailure message, refer to

Check Control 72 False alarm, refer to Uninten‐

tional alarm 43 Fan, refer to Air flow 128, 130 Fault displays, refer to Check

Control 72 Favorites buttons, onboard

monitor 24 Filler neck for engine oil 183 Fine wood, care 209 First aid kit 202 Fitting for towing, refer to Tow

fitting 205 Flat tire, changing wheels 196 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 97 Flat tire, repairing 175 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 94 Flat tire, warning lamp 95, 98 Flooding 149 Floor carpet, care 210 Floor mats, care 210 Fogged up windows 128 Fold-out position, windshield

wipers 66 Foot brake 149 Front airbags 91

Seite 222

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

222 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 223: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Front fog lamps 89 Front passenger airbags, auto‐

matic deactivation 93 Front passenger airbags, indi‐

cator lamp 93 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 97 Fuel 166 Fuel cap 164 Fuel consumption, current 75 Fuel consumption, refer to

Average fuel consump‐tion 79

Fuel filler flap 164 Fuel gauge 74 Fuel quality 166 Fuel recommendation 166 Fuel, tank capacity 215 Fuse 199

GGarage door opener, refer to

Universal garage dooropener 133

Gasoline 166 Gear change, automatic trans‐

mission 68 Gear shift indicator 76 General driving notes 148 Glass sunroof, refer to Panor‐

amic glass sunroof 45 Glove compartment 141 GREEN mode 156 GREEN mode, bonus

range 158 GREEN mode driving style

analysis 160 GREEN mode indicator 156 GREEN - program, driving dy‐

namics 108 GREEN tip 158 Gross vehicle weight, ap‐

proved 214 Ground clearance 150

HHalogen headlamps 190 Handbrake, refer to parking

brake 63 Hand-held transmitter, alter‐

nating code 134 Hazard warning flashers 201 Head airbags 91 Headlamp control, auto‐

matic 87 Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐

ture 87 Headlamp flasher 64 Headlamp glass 189 Headlamps, care 208 Headlamp washer system 64 Headliner 17 Head restraints 47 Head restraints, front 50 Head restraints, rear 51 Head-up Display 83 Head-up Display, standard

view 84 Heavy cargo, stowing 152 High-beam Assistant 88 High beams 64 High beams/low beams, refer

to High-beam Assistant 88 Hills 150 Hill start assistant, refer to

Drive-off assistant 109 Hints 6 Holder for beverages 142 Homepage 6 Hood 180 Horn 14 Hot exhaust system 149 HUD Head-up Display 83 Hydroplaning 149

IIce warning, see External tem‐

perature warning 75

Icy roads, see External tem‐perature warning 75

Identification marks, tires 171 Identification number, refer to

Important features in the en‐gine compartment 180

Ignition key, refer to Remotecontrol 34

Ignition off 59 Ignition on 59 Illuminated ring, central in‐

strument cluster 82 Indication of a flat tire 95, 98 Individual air distribu‐

tion 128, 130 Individual settings, refer to

Personal Profile 35 Inflation pressure, tires 168 Inflation pressure warning,

tires 97 Info display, refer to Com‐

puter 79 Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐

tor TPM 95 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor

FTM 98 Instrument cluster 71 Instrument cluster, electronic

displays 72 Instrument lighting 89 Integrated key 34 Intelligent Emergency Re‐

quest 201 Intelligent Safety 99 Intensity, AUTO program 130 Interior equipment 133 Interior lamps 89 Interior lamps via remote con‐

trol 37 Interior motion sensor 43 Interior rearview mirror, auto‐

matic dimming feature 53 Interior rearview mirror, com‐

pass 135 Interior rearview mirror, man‐

ually dimmable 53

Seite 223

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

223Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 224: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Internet site 6 Interval display, service re‐

quirements 76

JJacking points for the vehicle

jack 196 Joystick, automatic transmis‐

sion 68 Jump-starting 202

KKey/remote control 34 Keyless Go, refer to Comfort

Access 40 Key Memory, refer to Personal

Profile 35 Kickdown, automatic trans‐

mission 68 Knee airbag 91

LLamp replacement 189 Lamp replacement, front 190 Lamp replacement, rear 192 Lamp replacement, side 195 Lamps and bulbs 189 Language on Control Dis‐

play 82 Lashing eyes, securing

cargo 152 LATCH child restraint fixing

system 56 Launch Control 70 Leather, care 208 LED bug light 190 LED headlamps 190 LED ring, central instrument

cluster 82 LEDs, light-emitting di‐

odes 189 Left-hand traffic, lamp set‐

ting 89

Letters and numbers, enter‐ing 24

Light 86 Light-alloy wheels, care 209 Light-emitting diodes,

LEDs 189 Lighter 138 Lighting 86 Lighting via remote con‐

trol 37 Light switch 86 Load 152 Loading 151 Lock, door 38 Locking/unlocking via door

lock 38 Locking/unlocking with re‐

mote control 37 Locking, automatic 42 Locking, settings 42 Low beams 86 Low beams, automatic, refer

to High-beam Assistant 88 Lower back support, mechani‐

cal 48 Lug bolt lock 198 Luggage rack, refer to Roof-

mounted luggage rack 152 Lumbar support, mechani‐

cal 48

MMaintenance 186 Maintenance require‐

ments 186 Maintenance, service require‐

ments 76 Maintenance system,

MINI 186 Malfunction displays, refer to

Check Control 72 Manual air distribu‐

tion 128, 130 Manual air flow 128, 130

Manual mode, transmis‐sion 68

Manual operation, doorlock 38

Manual operation, exteriormirrors 52

Manual operation, fuel fillerflap 164

Manual operation, Park Dis‐tance Control PDC 119

Manual operation, rearviewcamera 121

Manual transmission 67 Manufacturer of the MINI 7 Marking on approved

tires 174 Marking, run-flat tires 175 Master key, refer to Remote

control 34 Maximum cooling 130 Maximum speed, display 77 Maximum speed, winter

tires 174 Measure, units of 82 Medical kit 202 Menu in instrument cluster 78 Menus, refer to onboard mon‐

itor operating concept 20 Microfilter 129, 132 MID - program, driving dy‐

namics 108 MINI Connected, refer to

Integrated Owner's Manual MINI maintenance sys‐

tem 186 MINIMALISM Analyser 160 MINIMALISM info 159 Minimum tread, tires 172 Mirrors 52 Mobile communication devi‐

ces in the vehicle 149 Mobility System 175 Mode, GREEN Mode 156 Modifications, technical, refer

to Safety 7 Moisture in headlamp 189

Seite 224

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

224 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 225: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐play 18

Mounting of child restraint fix‐ing systems 55

Multifunction steering wheel,buttons 14

Multimedia, refer toIntegrated Owner's Manual

NNavigation, refer to Integrated

Owner's Manual Neck restraints, front, refer to

Head restraints 50 Neck restraints, rear, refer to

Head restraints 51 New wheels and tires 173 No Passing Information 77 Nylon rope for tow-starting/

towing 205

OOBD Onboard Diagnos‐

tics 186 Obstacle marking, rearview

camera 122 Octane rating, refer to Recom‐

mended fuel grade 166 Odometer 74 Office, refer to Integrated

Owner's Manual Oil 182 Oil, adding 183 Oil additives 183 Oil change 184 Oil change interval, service re‐

quirements 76 Oil filler neck 183 Oil types, alternative 184 Oil types, approved 184 Old batteries, disposal 199 Onboard Diagnostics

OBD 186 Onboard monitor 18

Onboard monitor operatingconcept 18

Onboard monitor, refer toControl Display 18

Onboard vehicle tool kit 188 Opening/closing via door

lock 38 Opening/closing with remote

control 37 Operating menus, onboard

monitor 18 Optional equipment, standard

equipment 6 Outside air, refer to Automatic

recirculated-air control 131 Overheating of engine, refer

to Coolant temperature 74

PPaint, vehicle 208 Panoramic glass sunroof 45 Parallel parking assistant 122 Park Distance Control

PDC 118 Parked-car ventilation 132 Parked vehicle, condensa‐

tion 150 Parking aid, refer to PDC 118 Parking assistant 122 Parking brake 63 Parking lamps 86 Particulate filter 149 Parts and accessories 7 Passenger side mirror, tilting

downward 52 Pathway lines, rearview cam‐

era 121 PDC Park Distance Con‐

trol 118 Pedestrian warning with city

braking function 103 Performance Control 107 Personal Profile 35 Phone, refer to Integrated

Owner's Manual

Pinch protection system, glasssunroof 46

Pinch protection system, win‐dows 44

Plastic, care 209 Power failure 199 Power windows 44 Pressure, tire air pressure 168 Pressure warning, tires 97 Profile, refer to Personal Pro‐

file 35 Protective function, glass sun‐

roof 46 Protective function, win‐

dows 44 Push-and-turn switch, refer to

Controller 18, 19

RRadiator fluid 185 Radio-operated key, refer to

Remote control 34 Radio ready state 60 Radio, refer to Integrated

Owner's Manual Rain sensor 65 Rear fog lamps 89 Rear lamps 192 Rear luggage rack 153 Rearview camera 120 Rearview mirror 52 Rear window de‐

froster 128, 131 Recirculated-air filter 132 Recirculated-air

mode 128, 131 Recommended fuel

grade 166 Recommended tire

brands 174 Refueling 164 Remaining range 75 Remote control/key 34 Remote control, blocking 35

Seite 225

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

225Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 226: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Remote control, malfunc‐tion 38

Remote control, replacing thebattery 34

Remote control, univer‐sal 133

Replacement fuse 199 Replacing parts 188 Replacing the battery, remote

control 34 Replacing wheels/tires 173 Reporting safety defects 9 RES button 112 Reserve warning, refer to

Range 75 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 95 Retaining straps, securing

cargo 152 Retreaded tires 174 Right-hand traffic, lamp set‐

ting 89 Roadside parking lamps 86 RON recommended fuel

grade 166 Roof load capacity 214 Roof-mounted luggage

rack 152 Rope for tow-starting/

towing 205 RSC Run Flat System Compo‐

nent, refer to Run-flattires 175

Rubber components,care 209

Run-flat tires 175

SSafe braking 149 Safety 7 Safety belt reminder for driv‐

er's seat and front passengerseat 50

Safety belts 49 Safety belts, care 209

Safety systems, airbags 91 Saving fuel 155 Screen, refer to Control Dis‐

play 18 Screwdriver 188 Screw thread for tow fit‐

ting 205 Sealant 175 Seat belts, refer to Safety

belts 49 Seat heating, front 49 Seating position for chil‐

dren 55 Seats 47 Selection list in instrument

cluster 78 Selector lever, automatic

transmission 68 Sensors, care 210 Service and warranty 8 Service requirements, Condi‐

tion Based Service CBS 186 Service requirements, dis‐

play 76 Service, Roadside Assis‐

tance 202 Settings, locking/unlocking 42 Settings, mirrors 52 Settings on Control Display 81 Shifting, automatic transmis‐

sion 67 Shifting, manual transmis‐

sion 67 Shift paddles on steering

wheel 69 Side airbags 91 Signaling, horn 14 Signals when unlocking 42 Sitting safely 47 Size 214 Slide/tilt glass roof 45 Snow chains 178 Socket 137 Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐

nostics 186 Soot particulate filter 149

SOS button 201 Spare fuse 199 Specified engine oil types 184 Speed, average 80 Speed limit detection, on‐

board computer 80 Speed limiter, display 77 Speed Limit Information 77 Speed warning 81 Split screen 23 Sport automatic transmis‐

sion 69 Sport displays 80 SPORT program, Dynamic

Driving Control 108 Sport program, transmis‐

sion 68 Stability control systems 106 Standard view, Head-up Dis‐

play 84 Start/stop, automatic func‐

tion 61 Start/Stop button 59 Start function during malfunc‐

tion 35 Starting the engine 60 Status display, tires 94 Status information, onboard

monitor 23 Status of Owner's Manual 6 Steering wheel, adjusting 54 Steptronic, automatic trans‐

mission 67 Stopping the engine 60 Storage compartments 141 Storage, tires 174 Storing the vehicle 210 Summer tires, tread 172 Supplementary text mes‐

sages 73 Switch for Dynamic Driv‐

ing 108 Switch-on times, parked-car

ventilation 132 Switch, refer to Cockpit 14 Symbols 6

Seite 226

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

226 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 227: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Symbols in the status field 23

TTachometer 74 Tailgate 39 Tailgate via remote control 38 Tail lamps 192 Technical changes, refer to

Safety 7 Technical data 214 Temperature, air condi‐

tioner 128 Temperature, automatic cli‐

mate control 130 Temperature display for exter‐

nal temperature 75 Temperature, engine oil 74 Terminal, starting aid 202 Text messages, supplemen‐

tary 73 Theft alarm system, refer to

Alarm system 42 Theft protection, lug

bolts 198 Thigh support 48 Tilt alarm sensor 43 Time of arrival 80 Tire damage 173 Tire identification marks 171 Tire inflation pressure 168 Tire inflation pressure moni‐

tor, refer to FTM 97 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 94 Tires, changing 173 Tire sealant 175 Tires, everything on wheels

and tires 168 Tires, run-flat tires 175 Tire tread 172 Tone, refer to Integrated

Owner's Manual Tools 188 Total vehicle weight 214 Touchpad 21

Tourist function, refer toRight-hand/left-hand traf‐fic 89

Tow fitting 205 Towing 203 Tow-starting 203 TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 94 Traction control 107 TRACTION drive mode, driving

dynamics 107 Transmission, automatic 67 Transmission lock, releasing

manually 69 Transmission, manual 67 Transporting children

safely 55 Tread, tires 172 Trip computer 80 Triple turn signal activa‐

tion 64 Trip odometer 74 Turning circle lines, rearview

camera 121 Turn signal, front 190 Turn signal, side 195 Turn signals, operation 64 Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐

placement 192

UUnintentional alarm 43 Units of measure 82 Universal remote control 133 Unlock button, automatic

transmission 68 Unlocking/locking via door

lock 38 Unlocking/locking with re‐

mote control 37 Unlocking, settings 42 Updates made after the edito‐

rial deadline 6 Upholstery care 209 USB interface 137

VVehicle battery 198 Vehicle battery, replacing 199 Vehicle, breaking in 148 Vehicle care 208 Vehicle equipment 6 Vehicle identification number,

refer to Identification num‐ber in the engine compart‐ment 180

Vehicle jack 196 Vehicle paint 208 Vehicle storage 210 Vehicle wash 207 Ventilation 132 Ventilation, refer to Parked-

car ventilation 132 Voice activation system 26

WWarning messages, refer to

Check Control 72 Warning triangle 202 Washer fluid 66 Washer nozzles, wind‐

shield 66 Washer system 64 Washing, vehicle 207 Water on roads 149 Weights 214 Welcome lamps 87 Wheels, changing 173 Wheels, everything on wheels

and tires 168 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor

FTM 97 Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 94 Window defroster,

rear 128, 131 Windows, powered 44 Windshield de‐

froster 129, 131 Windshield washer fluid 66

Seite 227

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

227Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 228: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

Windshield washer nozzles 66 Windshield washer system 64 Windshield wiper 64 Windshield wipers, fold-out

position 66 Winter storage, care 210 Winter tires, suitable tires 174 Winter tires, tread 172 Wiper blades, replacing 188 Wiper fluid 66 Wiper system 64 Wood, care 209 Word match concept, naviga‐

tion 25 Wrench 188

Seite 228

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

228 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14

Page 229: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor
Page 230: 2014 MINI Hardtop With Onboard Monitor

01 4

0 2

927

905

ue

*BL292790500G*

DRIVE ME.Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 927 905 - II/14